JP2021194412A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve a game amusement.SOLUTION: A special development performance is executed which includes a first performance in which visibility of a performance image is reduced, a second performance which is executed after the first performance and in which prior stage information is visibly displayed, and a third performance which is executed after the second performance and in which subsequent stage information having an emphasis degree higher than that of the prior stage information is visibly displayed, and can execute a special development performance having a performance period longer than that of a specialty development performance. A period since execution of the development performance to notification of control to an advantageous state is shorter in the specialty development performance than in the special development performance. Further, a game machine includes plural pieces of light emission means. First light emission means emits light in a mode according to a specific light emission performance in a first period since start of the specific light emission performance to predetermined timing and in a second period since the predetermined timing to specific timing of a variable display considered as an object of the specific light emission performance. The second light emission means emits light in a mode according to the variable display being executed in the second period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In the conventional gaming machine, a meter whose display mode can be changed from level 1 to bell 4 is displayed in the image display device, and based on the display mode of the meter being level 4, a plurality of super reach Some of the reach effects are performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-221121

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that only one of the reach effects of a plurality of super reach is executed based on the change of the display mode of the meter to level 4, and the game entertainment cannot be improved. There is.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. Execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including reach effect A), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). Possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η). In the variable display, the portion where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), the special development after being notified that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect B (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), which is the part where the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the loss) is once notified.
The development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect is shown in the figure. The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in 11-23, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in 29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed). ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of ζ, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the reach effect E is further executed).
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect longer than L6b),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result). The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F are the reach effect E development notification effect start timing to the reach effect E end timing ( The length of the period until the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than L11),
Moreover,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display and an active display) corresponding to a variable display, and
A portion for displaying the specific display effect (for example, the hold display or the active display in any of the display patterns α to the display pattern γ) based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the occurrence of a start winning prize). ), A specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and an effect executing means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute the effect.
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 15). -28, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), before the display of the hold display is completed. The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. In that case, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body). Including lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term). The second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of late winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness C1 and The part that blinks in the cycle T1 and blinks in the luminance C2 and the cycle T2 during the flash effect execution period at the time of the late winning).
The second light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a mode corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-28). As shown in, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the luminance C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part that blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and in the first period of the specific light emission effect, the first Not only the 1 light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can be made to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. Is even easier for the player to recognize.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means A. Conventionally, based on the fact that a predetermined condition (entering the starting region of a gaming ball) is satisfied as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-105941 in a gaming machine, a specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ( (Holding display or active display) is displayed on the display means, and a look-ahead notice suggesting that the variable display based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition is controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display can be executed. There is something. Further, some conventional gaming machines can execute a look-ahead notice (specific light emission effect) by causing the light emitting means provided in the gaming machine to emit light.

However, depending on the timing at which the display of the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily recognizing a specific display which is a target of a specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of means A is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display and being able to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display and an active display) corresponding to a variable display, and
A portion for displaying the specific display effect (for example, the hold display or the active display in any of the display patterns α to the display pattern γ) based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the occurrence of a start winning prize). ), A specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and an effect executing means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute the effect.
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 15). -28, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), before the display of the hold display is completed. The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. In that case, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body). Including lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term). The second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of late winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness C1 and The part that blinks in the cycle T1 and blinks in the luminance C2 and the cycle T2 during the flash effect execution period at the time of the late winning).
The second light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a mode corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-28). As shown in, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the luminance C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part that blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect is achieved. In the above, not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, and therefore, it is the target of the specific light emitting effect. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a loss with a time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the effect when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing a comparison between the first stage effect and the second stage effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image display device. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a meter effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the meter effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st timing to the 5th timing in each fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reach production E development suggestion effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a branch destination suggestion effect decision process. (A) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reach effect G development suggestion effect decision process. (A) is a diagram showing the reach effect determination ratio at the time of a big hit, (B) is a diagram showing the reach effect determination ratio at the time of off, and (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between the reach effect C and the reach effect D. (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference between the determination ratios of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ at the time of a big hit and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference between the determination ratios of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It is explanatory drawing of the difference of the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the variation pattern of reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the chance up effect decision processing. It is explanatory drawing of the feasibility period of the chance up effect in each reach effect. It is explanatory drawing of the production which can be executed as a chance up production. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing whether or not the chance-up effect is executed in each reach effect and the effect pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the effect pattern of the chance-up effect in each reach effect. be. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the change rate of the display mode of an active display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modification. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the chance up effect, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the length of the revival effect in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the hold display notice effect as a look-ahead notice, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the specific display start effect execution process. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the specific display start effect A. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the specific display start effect B. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flash effect execution processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flash effect execution processing at the time of a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the flash effect at the time of the first prize and the flash effect at the time of the second prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the flash effect at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state where the gaming effect lamp is lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state where the gaming effect lamp is off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness (C2), and a pachinko game machine showing a transition of the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp in a state where the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness. It is a front view of. The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning when the start prize that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning occurs, the lighting of the flash lamp, the game effect lamp and the start port lamp at the time of winning, and the timing of displaying the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart shown. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start prize which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning when the start prize that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning in the modified example is output, the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp and the start port lamp are lit, and the effect image and the silhouette image are displayed. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a timing chart which shows lighting of a flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a start opening lamp at the time of a prize in a modification, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and the timing of operation of a movable body. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a timing chart which shows the timing of the display of the flash lamp and the silhouette image at the time of winning in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which shows the timing of the operation of the flash lamp at the time of a prize and the movable body in the modification, and the figure which shows the determination ratio of the timing which the light emission mode of a lamp of a prize at the time of a change changes. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold display / active display in the modification, the suggestion content of each display mode, and the selection ratio at the time of deciding the execution of a slash effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of hold display and active display at the time of execution of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of hold display and active display at the time of execution of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of hold display and active display at the time of execution of the flash effect at the time of a prize in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the start winning which is the target of the flash effect at the time of a prize occurs during the variable display in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of an ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting an alternating current (AC) into a direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control the game state, the game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (A).

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "missing time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, it is common among the hit determination values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values which can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 029SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The feature unit 029SG includes the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG.

The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. Execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including reach effect A), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). Possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η). In the variable display, the portion where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), the special development after being notified that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect B (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), which is the part where the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the loss) is once notified.
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed). ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of ζ, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the reach effect E is further executed).
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect longer than L6b),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result). The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F are the reach effect E development notification effect start timing to the reach effect E end timing ( The length of the period until the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than L11),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
The effect period of the second suggestion effect is longer than the effect period of the first suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is the execution of the reach effect A. The part that is set longer than the length L1 of the period),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the second suggestion effect for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, unlike the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect does not execute the development effect before the effect result is notified, so that even if the special development effect is not executed, the first suggestion effect is performed. 2 It is possible to surely draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the control of the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect.
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect In the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the meter effect is determined, and in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, the portion for executing the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect) is provided.
The means for executing the development suggestion effect is
As the development suggestion effect, the special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect can be executed both during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect (. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, when the reach effect A is being executed in the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, the super reach β, the super reach δ, the super reach ζ, and the super reach η. The part where the meter effect can be executed while the reach effect B is being executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to arouse the expectation that the player's special development effect is executed by the special development suggestion effect during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and the execution period of the second suggestion effect. can.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects.
When the special suggestion effect is executed without executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the development effect execution means sets the special development effect before the special suggestion effect is executed. It can be executed as a three-development pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed. At the second timing, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once, and the high expectation reach production development notification production is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed, the player is focused on whether or not the special development effect is executed and the special suggestion effect with high expectation is executed. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect.
During the period from the execution of the special development effect to the execution of the special suggestion effect and the notification that the special suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the third suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed. It is longer than the period until it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the reach effect is from the high expectation reach effect development notification effect start timing. The length L13 of the period until the end timing of I (notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F. The part that is done),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by prolonging the period until the notification when the special development effect with high expectation is executed, the expectation controlled to the advantageous state can be effectively enhanced.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects.
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and FIG. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, the portion for executing the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect) is provided.
The development suggestion effect execution means includes a special development suggestion effect (for example, a meter effect) that suggests the execution of the special development effect by changing the effect mode stepwise, and the effect mode changing stepwise. It is possible to execute a special development suggestion effect (for example, reach performance E output development suggestion effect) that suggests the execution of the special development effect.
The rate at which the effect mode changes to a specific number of stages in the special development suggestion effect is higher than the rate at which the effect mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 11-24 and 11-54). As described above, in the meter effect, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes in 5 stages (6 stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed is included), whereas in the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image is displayed. Part that changes in two stages),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the first suggestion effect in which the special development suggestion effect is executed and the second suggestion effect in which the special development suggestion effect is executed, and the special development in the special development suggestion effect. Since it is easier to change to a specific number of stages than a suggestion effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not it changes to a specific number of stages, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect.
The period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ. In the variable display in the variable pattern, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period L6a),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the special development effect is executed, the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect, is executed, and after the execution of the special development effect is suggested, the fourth suggestion effect is executed. Since it is possible to suggest for a longer period of time than it is executed, it is possible to improve the production interest of the special development suggestion production.

The gaming machine according to the eighth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect.
When the second suggestion effect is executed, the development suggestion effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestion effect until the effect result of the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, the reach effect). The E development suggestion effect is a part that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is recognized that the execution of the special development suggestion effect during the execution of the second suggestion effect informs the player that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above.

The gaming machine according to the ninth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
An advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a chance-up effect) that suggests that the effect result of the suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the suggestion effect, and constitutes the advantageous result suggestion effect. The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31, and then the variable display shown in FIG. 10). The part that executes the middle production process) is provided.
The number of times the configuration effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is executed is larger than the number of times the configuration effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed (for example, shown in FIGS. 11-34). As described above, during the execution of the reach effect F, a total of three effects are displayed, that is, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are displayed as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. While it is feasible (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U), while the reach effect A is being executed, the reach title is displayed in red as an effect that constitutes the chance-up effect. A total of two effects of the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed (the part where the chance-up effect can be executed by pattern P and pattern Q),
The number of executions of the configuration effect when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of executions of the configuration effect when the second suggestion effect is executed (for example, shown in FIGS. 11-34). As described above, while the reach effect E is being executed, a total of two effects, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, can be executed as the effects constituting the chance-up effect (chance-up effect is changed to pattern S and pattern Q). While the reach effect B is being executed, there are a total of three effects that constitute the chance-up effect: the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200. The part where the effect can be executed (the part where the chance-up effect can be executed by pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the special development effect is executed before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified and the third suggestion effect is further executed, the first suggestion effect is executed. When the third suggestion effect is executed, the number of times the configuration effect is executed increases, so that the player can more appropriately pay attention to the effect result of the third suggestion effect. 2 In the case where the special development effect is executed and the fourth suggestion effect is further executed after being notified that the effect is not controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the effect of the suggestion effect, the composition effect when the fourth suggestion effect is executed. Since the number of executions of is less than or equal to the number of executions of the configuration effect when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the effect result of the fourth suggestion effect. You can improve the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine according to the tenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect.
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means can execute the advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a chance-up effect) in a plurality of modes including a common aspect.
Even if the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect is executed, the expectation degree differs depending on the type of the suggestion effect in which the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-12, the reach title). The part where the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display and the movement of the movable body 32 is performed in any of the reach effects A to the reach effect F).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect while suppressing the increase in the number of modes of the advantageous result suggestion effect. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth or tenth aspect.
The suggestion effect executing means can display an image corresponding to the expectation degree corresponding to the expectation degree of the suggestion effect when executing the suggestion effect, and the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed on the expectation degree corresponding image. (For example, as shown in the modification 029SG-5, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, they are displayed together with the reach title image. The part that changes the display mode of the expectation image showing the jackpot expectation (increasing the number of stars displayed as the expectation image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the expected degree corresponding image changes with the execution of the advantageous result suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the attention to the expectation degree corresponding image, so that the player can accurately determine the expectation degree of the suggestion effect. Can be recognized by.

The gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first to eleventh forms.
A specific image suggestion effect (for example, a modification) that is different from the suggestion effect and suggests that the specific image (for example, active display) displayed during the suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous state. As shown in FIGS. 11-57 as a modified example 029SG-1 as a specific image suggestion effect executing means (for example, an active display effect provided in the display area of the image display device 5) capable of executing the specific image suggestion effect effect (eg, the active display effect shown in Example 029SG-1). The display area 029SG005F is provided with a portion in which the active display is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes and the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in).
The specific image suggestion effect executing means can execute a common specific image suggestion effect in common in any of the different types of suggestion effects as the specific image suggestion effect (for example, the active display is a white circle, Blue circle, red circle can be displayed),
The ratio of the common specific image suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect executed before the special development effect in the first development pattern is executed after the special development effect is executed. It is lower than the ratio at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as a modified example 029SG-1, variable display as an effect result of the reach effect A. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed and the reach effect F is executed before the result is notified, the active display is displayed during the execution of the reach effect A. The rate at which the aspect changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is P2, and the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect F is a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape. The rate of change to P3 is lower than P3),
The ratio of the common specific image suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is the ratio of the special development effect being executed in the second development pattern. Is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect (eg, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as variant 029SG-1). The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach η is the effect result of the reach effect B. The display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect E in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed and the reach effect E is further executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified. The rate of change from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is higher than P1),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and the third suggestion effect is executed, the third suggestion effect is executed by executing the specific image suggestion effect before the start of the special development effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize this in advance, and in the third suggestion effect and the fourth suggestion effect, the common specific image suggestion effect is appropriately executed according to the degree of expectation, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect.
The specific image suggestion effect executing means changes the display mode of the specific image from the first mode (for example, a white circle or a blue circle) to a second mode (for example, a second mode) having a higher expectation than the first mode. Can be varied into any of a number of embodiments (red circle), including
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect before the development effect is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect after the development effect is executed (. For example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-2, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect F is a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle. The ratio P3 that changes to the shape is set higher than the ratio P2 that the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect A, and the super reach ζ. In the variable display of the variation pattern of, the ratio P1 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E is active during the execution of the reach effect B. The part where the display mode is set higher than the rate at which the white circle or blue circle changes to the red circle),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and the display mode of the specific image is changed to the second mode before the development effect. It is possible to reduce the risk of deterioration of the game entertainment due to the person's recognition in advance that the degree of expectation is high.

The gaming machine according to the 14th aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the 12th or 13th aspect.
When the special suggestion effect is executed without executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the development effect execution means sets the special development effect before the special suggestion effect is executed. It can be executed as a three-development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, high expectations are placed from the timing before the reach when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed. Degree reach production The part where the development notification production is executed),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect before the special suggestion effect in the third development pattern is the display of the specific image after the special suggestion effect is executed in the third development pattern. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, as shown in the modified example 029SG-3, the display mode of the active display is before the start of the reach effect I. The rate at which is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape P5, and the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of reach effect I. Ratio to be set higher than P6),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific image is changed to the second mode before the special suggestion effect, so that the player can easily recognize that the special suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine according to the fifteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 12 to 14.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14).
A decidable means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17) that can determine that the development effect is executed when the variable display is started.
Regarding the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage, the CPU 103 determines that the development effect is executed before the determination means is determined (for example, in the winning random value determination process of the modified example 029SG-4). When the fluctuation pattern (variation category) is determined to be super reach, which of the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α to super reach λ, is executed (which of reach effect A to reach effect I is executed during variable display). The part that determines whether it is) and
Equipped with
In the specific image suggestion effect executing means, as the specific image suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the special development effect is executed and the special development effect being executed are executed based on the determination result of the determination means. (For example, in the modified example 029SG-4, a triangle, a quadrangle, a star shape, etc. are provided in addition to the circle as the display mode of the hold storage table display, and the hold storage display is any of them. Reach production E, reach production F, reach production G, reach production H, or reach production I depending on whether the shape is displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the specific image suggestion effect even before the start of the variable display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. , Reach effect C), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect D), special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect G), and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects. The part where the CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, super reach). In the variable display of the variation pattern of κ, the part where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect C and the reach effect D), the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed. After being notified that the effect is not controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the effect, a special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the variation of the super reach θ. In the variable display of the pattern, the development effect execution means (for example, the effect control) which is the part where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D). The part where the CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) and
In the first development pattern, a predetermined effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the precursor effect shown in FIGS. 11-9) before the special development effect is executed is shown in FIG. The part that executes the effect processing during the variable display shown) and
Equipped with
The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), the reach effect D has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect C).
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the super reach κ. In the variable display of the variation pattern of, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect I is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the variation pattern of θ, the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and then the reach effect G is executed. Part),
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect different from the special suggestion effect and the special suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9). In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed and the reach effect H is further executed),
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variable display result is In the case of a big hit, that is, when the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, the determination ratio of the super reach κ big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the variable display is variable. Reach effect G development notification effect is executed during display Super reach θ Higher than the determination rate of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7)),
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect G development notification effect. The part that is set longer than L8),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
The ratio of the special development effect being executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the first suggestion effect and the ratio of the special development effect being executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the second suggestion effect. Different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), when the reach effect C is executed, the rate at which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect. Is a part higher than the ratio at which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect when the reach effect D is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the production can be diversified by the combination of the type of suggestion production and the type of development production, and the suggestion production and the development production can have a predetermined relationship, so that the suggestion production and the development production can be related. You can improve the production of.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
A development pre-effect execution means capable of executing the development pre-effect before the special development effect or the specific development effect is executed (for example, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is provided. The part where the pre-effect is executed from the timing before, and the part where the pre-effect is executed from the timing before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ),
The development pre-effect execution means can execute the development pre-effect common to the case where the special development effect is executed and the case where the specific development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-51). , The part where the pre-production of the common mode is executed in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the attention to the development production by executing the development pre-production, and to draw the player's attention to whether the special development production or the specific development production is executed as the development production. You can improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
A special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of the pattern Z displaying the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5) and a specific development suggesting the execution of the specific development effect. A suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of a pattern Y displaying the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) and a common development suggestion effect (for example) that suggests execution of both the special development effect and the specific development effect. , The branch destination suggestion effect of the pattern X that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X in the image display device 5 and the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the branch destination effect shown in FIGS. 11-27). A portion for executing the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after determining the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the determination process).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the special development suggestion effect, the specific development suggestion effect, and the common development suggestion effect is executed as the development suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects.
The second development is more than the first difference, which is the difference between the ratio at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern and the ratio at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller (for example, 11-30 (for example). As shown in D), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach. When the variable display result becomes a big hit with respect to the variation pattern of the reach effect G development notification effect and the super reach θ in which the reach effect G is executed after the effect result is notified as the effect C or the reach effect D, the super reach κ While the difference between the ratio at which the reach effect C is executed and the ratio at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern is 60%, the reach effect is produced by the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ. The difference between the rate at which C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 40%),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is the first development pattern in which the special development effect is executed, or the second development pattern in which the special development effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to guess whether or not it is, it becomes possible to pay attention to which of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect.
The rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern are the same or substantially the same (for example, modified example 029SG-). As shown in 10, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the portion in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are the same).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is expected that the special development effect is executed in the second development pattern regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed. Because you will be able to do it, you can improve your game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth or fifth aspect.
The expectation when the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern is the same as or substantially the same as the expectation when the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. (For example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree and the execution of the reach effect D when the execution of the reach effect C is determined are determined. The part where the expected degree of big hit is the same),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is similarly in an advantageous state. You will be able to expect more, so you can improve your game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects.
A first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) suggesting that the effect result of the first suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the first suggestion effect, and the second suggestion. Execution of advantageous result suggestion effect that can execute the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the effect. Means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 after determining the execution of the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31).
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and FIG. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
Equipped with
The ratio at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is the ratio of the development suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The rate at which the effect is executed is different (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-6, for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion effect at a different rate than in the case of effect D),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution ratio of the development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect is different between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that it is suggested that the development suggestion effect is executed. Since it can be performed suitably, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the eighth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
A first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) suggesting that the effect result of the first suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the first suggestion effect, and the second suggestion. Execution of advantageous result suggestion effect that can execute the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the effect. Means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 after determining the execution of the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31).
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and FIG. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
Equipped with
When the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern, the ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect is the first in the first development pattern. 2 When the suggestion effect is executed, the ratio is different from the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as a modification 029SG-13). Regarding the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. , The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance-up effect at different rates depending on whether the execution of the reach effect C is decided and the execution of the reach effect D is decided).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution ratios of the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect, which suggest that the effect result is advantageous, are different between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suggest the production result, and thus it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the ninth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
The degree of relationship between the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the suggestion by the second advantageous result suggestion effect is the specific development effect or the special development effect after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect. Is higher than the relationship with respect to the effect result of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, in FIG. 11-28 (A)). As shown, the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ depending on the variable display result. Whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern are whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed and then develops into one of the reach effect G to the reach effect I, and these reach effect G to the reach effect. The part that is determined according to which of I it develops),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the suggestion by the first special development effect and the second special development effect is the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect close to the execution time of the first special development effect or the second special development effect. Since it is largely related to this, the attention to the specific development effect or the special development effect can be increased by executing the first special development effect and the second special development effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the tenth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to the ninth aspects.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
The ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed differs between before and after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, modified example 029SG-12). As described above, the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is performed in any of the reach effects A to the reach effect F).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect can be suitably executed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to which of the first development pattern and the second development pattern.

The gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to tenth aspects.
As the notification mode of the production results in the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the first notification mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7) in which it is simply notified that the advantageous state is not controlled is super reach. In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, the portion where the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D and the variable display ends) and the above-mentioned after being notified once that the advantageous state is not controlled. A second notification mode in which it is notified that the control is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, after notifying once that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D shown in the modified example 029SG-7, is again performed. It has a second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit.
When the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed is the first. When the effect result of the 1 suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode, the ratio is the same as the ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example). As shown in the modified example 029SG-7, the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode. And, when the effect results (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode, the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z is the same).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are notified in the second notification mode, so that the player can be given an unexpected feeling, and the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect can be produced. The first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect depends on the case where the result is notified in the first notification mode and the case where the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode. Since the processing for determining the execution of the above can be standardized, the amount of data required for the processing can be suppressed.

The gaming machine according to the 12th aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 7th to 11th aspects.
As the notification mode of the production results in the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the first notification mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7) in which it is simply notified that the advantageous state is not controlled is super reach. In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, the portion where the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D and the variable display ends) and the above-mentioned after being notified once that the advantageous state is not controlled. A second notification mode in which it is notified that the control is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, after notifying once that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D shown in the modified example 029SG-7, is again performed. It has a second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit.
When the special development effect is executed after the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is described. The ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when it is notified that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is determined by the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. When notified in the second notification mode, the ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is different (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-8, the reach effect C or After the reach effect D is executed and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are executed, and the reach effect G is executed. When it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of (when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ big hit (PB1-7)), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ big hit. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in is the chance-up effect executed in the variable display in which the effect results (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. The part that differs from the ratio),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, the first advantageous result suggestion depends on whether or not the special development effect is executed before it is notified that the advantageous state is controlled. Since the ratio at which the production or the second advantageous result suggestion production is executed can be different, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to the twelfth aspects.
The advantageous result suggestion effect executing means includes a plurality of advantageous result suggestion effects including the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z). Is feasible and
The execution ratio of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, the branch destination suggestion effects are pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z. The part where the execution rate of the high expectation reach production development notification production differs depending on which one is executed),
During the execution of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, the special development effect is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect having the highest execution rate of the special development effect is executed. If this is the case, it will be an effect result for notifying that the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect being executed is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-9). When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, or when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed, the reach effect I When is executed, it is notified that the variable display result will be a big hit),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised, and the player pays attention to whether or not the special development effect is executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect is executed. Because it can be made to, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 11-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 029SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-1 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing" or "big hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening, which notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the big hit type (probability change or non-probability change) as a winning determination result. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for the variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-1 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-2, in the feature unit 029SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 is one of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. Numerical data indicating the unit may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-3 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 029SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 029SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 029SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in this feature unit 029SG) (about 1 in this feature unit 029SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 11-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 029SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4 (B). In the feature unit 029SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A to the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is in the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously without intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 029SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG. In this feature unit 029SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 029SG is provided with one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in this feature unit 029SG, as super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super Although 11 types of variation patterns of reach κ and super reach λ are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and 12 or more or 10 or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

The super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and the super reach β. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ. ), A fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is out of alignment as the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ, and a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is out of alignment as the fluctuation pattern of super reach ε. Fluctuation pattern (PA2-6), fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach η. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The deviation pattern (PA2-9), the fluctuation pattern (PA2-10) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-8) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-11) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-10) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ. ) Is provided with a variation pattern (PA2-12) that is different from the above.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 029SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 029SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. With some exceptions, the longer the special map fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special map fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to be longer than that of the super reach β fluctuation pattern. The special map fluctuation time is set longer than the special map fluctuation time, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach δ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ε fluctuation pattern is set. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach δ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ε fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time, and the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern, and the special figure of the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is set. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern.

Of these super reach α fluctuation patterns to super reach κ fluctuation patterns, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern are not provided with fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a big hit. In other words, regarding these super reach α fluctuation patterns to super reach κ fluctuation patterns, the super reach α fluctuation pattern has the shortest special figure fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern excluding the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation is set low, and the jackpot expectation is set to increase as the special figure fluctuation time becomes longer.

Further, in this feature unit 029SG, a super reach λ fluctuation pattern is provided as a super reach fluctuation pattern having a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach κ fluctuation pattern. The super reach λ fluctuation pattern is exceptionally set so that the special figure fluctuation time is longer than the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random values for determining the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) has a length of execution period as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. Is a variation pattern in which the reach effect A of L1 is executed and the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect A. As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the super reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the reach effect B of (L2> L1) is executed and the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the super reach α fluctuation pattern and the super reach β fluctuation pattern are from the variable display start timing to the end timing of the reach effect (notification of the variable display result). It is also a variation pattern that can execute a meter effect that suggests the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect over the timing). As described above, since the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the reach effect A, the meter effect execution period in the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set. The length L5 is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter effect executable period in the super reach α fluctuation pattern (L5> L4).

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (C), the super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is an effect pattern for notifying the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. The execution period of both the reach effect C and the reach effect D is set to the length L3. Further, in the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, the reach effect H is further executed after the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Which of the reach effect H development notification effect to notify and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to notify that either the reach effect F or the reach effect I is executed (which notification is executed). It is also a variation pattern that can execute the branch destination suggestion effect that suggests (whether to branch to the effect).

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (D), the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) has a reach effect B having an execution period of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. Is executed to notify that the variable display result is out of order, and then the reach effect E development suggestion effect that suggests the development to the reach effect E can be executed (reach effect E development suggestion effect feasible period length: L6a). This is a fluctuation pattern that does not eventually develop into the reach effect E and notifies the loss. As with the super reach β fluctuation pattern, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation in which the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect (length of the meter effect executable period: L5). It is also a pattern, and the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (E), the super reach ε fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D (either reach) as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display. It is possible to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect that suggests the development to the reach effect G after notifying that the variable display result is out of order by executing L3) for the length of the effect execution period, and finally the reach. It is a fluctuation pattern that notifies the deviation without developing into the production G. Further, the super reach ε fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. It is possible to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect after executing the reach effect B of the above to notify that the variable display result is out of order, and further notify that the reach effect E develops into the reach effect E development notification effect ( Reach effect E This is a variation pattern in which the reach effect E is executed after the length of the execution period of the development notification effect: L6b) is executed. The super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed (the length of the meter effect executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect B. The length L5 of the meter effect enablement period is set to be longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect enablement period. The length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter effect executable period. Further, in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η fluctuation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) executes the reach effect A as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display. A high-expectation reach effect that informs the development of a reach effect (reach effect F or reach effect I, which will be described later in the case of this feature unit) with a high expectation of a big hit instead of the reach effect A from the middle of the reach effect A. It is a variation pattern in which the development notification effect is executed over L7 (L7> L6b), which is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect F is further executed. As for the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when the reach effect A switches to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (the reach effect A has a high expectation reach in the middle). Since the effect is switched to the effect development notification effect, the length of the meter effect enablement period is also a fluctuation pattern of L4'), which is shorter than L4. Further, in the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F (notification timing of the variable display result) is the reach effect in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E is set to L12 (L12> L11), which is longer than L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (H), the super reach θ fluctuation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. (The length of the execution period of any of the reach effects is also L3), and after notifying that the variable display result is out of order in the reach effects C or the reach effects D, the reach effect G development suggestion effect can be executed. Further, the reach effect G development notification effect for notifying the development to the reach effect G is executed over L8 (L7> L8), which is shorter than the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect. Further, it is a fluctuation pattern that executes the reach effect G. Further, the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is executed, and the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed in place of the reach effect C or the reach effect D from the middle of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect H development notification is notified that the reach effect H is further developed. It is a fluctuation pattern that executes the effect and executes the reach effect H. Further, the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-9 (J), the super reach κ fluctuation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is executed, and the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed in place of the reach effect C or the reach effect D from the middle of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the length of the execution period is L7. This is a variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed. Further, the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Further, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) is highly expected in the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F is set to L13 (L13> L12> L11) longer than L12.

The super reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) has a high expectation reach effect development in which the length of the execution period is L7 from the timing before the reach in the fluctuation pattern of other super reach during the variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed. In addition, the super reach λ fluctuation pattern can execute the meter effect from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (high expectation reach effect development notification from the timing before the reach). Since the effect is executed, the length of the meter effect executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'': L4> L4'> L4''), which is shorter than L4'). Further, in the super reach λ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) is L13 (L13), which is the same as the super reach κ. > L12> L11).

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), as the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect in the feature unit 029SG, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened. A blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, a pre-stage effect that displays a front line on the image display device 5 after the blackout effect, and a switching effect after the pre-stage effect. After the switching effect, the image display device 5 displays the rear-stage effect, and after the post-stage effect, the movable body 32 is placed on the front surface of the display area of the image display device 5 from the origin position above the image display device 5. A movable body effect that drops (moves) to an effect position that overlaps with a substantially central position is executed.

In the first stage effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-55, the dialogue content spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007. At the same time, it is an effect of outputting as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the latter stage effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-55, following the first stage effect, the dialogue content spoken by the character is displayed as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect of outputting as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the dialogue of the first stage production is "I'm not alone ... I'll show everyone's power!", And the dialogue of the second stage production is "Miracle Attack!".

More specifically, the first stage production is composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the lines of "not one person ..." are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and at the same time. In the display area of the image display device 5, the seven characters of "not one person ..." are displayed. Then, in the second period, the dialogue "I will show everyone's power!" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and at the same time, the "I will show everyone's power!" 12 in the display area of the image display device 5. The characters are displayed below the characters "I'm not alone ...". Further, the subsequent effect is also composed of a first period and a second period. In the first period, the lines of "Miracle" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and in the display area of the image display device 5. The four characters of the "miracle" are displayed. Then, in the second period, the lines of "Attack!" Are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the five characters of "Attack!" Are below the characters of "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

That is, in the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the feature unit 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the first stage effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the second stage effect, and the first stage effect is the first. The number of characters displayed in the two periods is larger than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the subsequent production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the display mode of the lines in the front stage effect is different from the display mode of the lines in the rear stage effect, and in particular, the lines in the rear stage effect are the display of the lines in the front stage effect. It is displayed in a display mode in which the degree of emphasis is higher than that of the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen and the character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 029SG007 composed of a plurality of characters (for example, "not one person ...") is gradually displayed in the first period. The character image 029SG007, which is displayed in a large and bright manner (fade-in) and then consists of a plurality of characters (for example, "I will show everyone's power!"), Is gradually enlarged and bright in the second period. It is displayed in an aspect (fade-in). In addition, the character image 029SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone ... I'll show you the power of everyone!") Is displayed in the largest and brightest form, and then gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade out). And eventually disappear. The character image 029SG007 may be moved while fading in or fading out.

On the other hand, in the latter stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the first stage effect, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "mi", "la", "ku", "le"). ) Is displayed (frame-in) so as to move while rotating from the right side of the display screen toward the center in order in the first period (frame-in), and a plurality of character images 029SG008 (for example, one character) are displayed. "A", "Ta", "Tsu", "Ku", "!") Are displayed (frame-in) so that they move while rotating from the bottom to the center of the display screen in the second period (dynamic display). Will be done. Further, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") Are the largest and are displayed brightly, they move so as to spread radially toward the surroundings and finally disappear from the display screen. It is displayed in the mode (frame out).

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the character image 029SG007 of the previous stage effect is small, planar (two-dimensional), has a slow movement (change speed of the display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. .. On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 of the latter stage effect is larger and three-dimensional (three-dimensional) than the character image 029SG007 of the first stage effect, and the movement (change speed (movement speed) of the display mode by frame-in) is fast and has high brightness. It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-55).

If the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the second stage effect is larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the first stage effect, the character image at the time of fade-in or frame-in is performed. The size and brightness of a part of the above may be reversed. Further, although the dialogue content is different between the first stage effect and the second stage effect, at least a part of the content may be common.

In this way, the larger the size of the character image that composes the dialogue, the higher the degree of emphasis, the more three-dimensional the form is, the higher the emphasis is, and the faster the movement is, the higher the emphasis is. It can be said that the higher the brightness is, the higher the emphasis is. In the above, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image are illustrated in a form in which the latter stage effect has a higher degree of emphasis than the first stage effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage effect is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one element of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image of is higher than that of the character image of the previous stage effect. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis includes those in which the thickness of the characters is higher in the thicker than in the thinner ones, and in the color, the ones with higher saturation and lightness are higher. May be good. Further, not only the display mode of the character image itself but also a special image such as an effect image may be displayed around the character image to increase the degree of emphasis.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG. In this feature unit 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a big hit, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (Variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (Variation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (Variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (Variation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (Variation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (Variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (Variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1 It is determined from -9 (variation pattern of super reach κ jackpot) and PB1-10 (variation pattern of super reach λ jackpot).

When determining the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, set the determination ratio of PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest, and set PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern). , PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (variation of super reach η jackpot) Pattern), PB1-7 (Variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (Variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1-9 (Variation pattern of super reach κ jackpot), PB1-10 (Variation pattern of super reach λ jackpot) The determination ratio may be increased in the order of (variation pattern of) (determination ratio of each super reach variation pattern when the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected: PB1-2 <PB1-3 <PB1-4 <PB1-5 < PB1-6 <PB1-7 <PB1-8 <PB1-9 <PB1-10).

In the present feature unit 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same big hit variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. A plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables having different determination ratios of any one of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and at least two or more jackpot fluctuation pattern determination ratios are different. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables may be provided, and variation patterns may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables according to the jackpot type. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a jackpot. You can improve your hobby.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern for normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach α loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach β loss), PA2 -4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ outlier), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ outlier), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε outlier), PA2-7 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ζ outlier) , PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of outlier of super reach θ), PA2-10 (variation pattern of outlier of super reach ι), PA2-11 (variation of out of super reach κ) Pattern) and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ outlier).

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 029SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

When the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination tables A to D, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1 for the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table B) If it is PA1-2, if it is the deviation pattern determination table C, it is PA1-3, if it is the deviation pattern determination table D, it is PA1-4), and PA2-1 (normal reach is lost). (Variation pattern of Super Reach α), PA2-2 (Variation pattern of Super Reach α), PA2-3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ), PA2-5 (Super Reach) δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach ε out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-7 (super reach ζ out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 ( Super reach θ out-of-range fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (super reach ι out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (super reach κ out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-12 (super reach λ out-of-order fluctuation pattern) determined in this order The ratio may be set to be low (determination ratio of each super reach variation pattern when the outlier variation pattern determination table is selected: PA2-12 <PA2-11 <PA2-10 <PA2-9 <PA2-8 <PA2-7. <PA2-6 <PA2-5 <PA2-4 <PA2-3 <PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern judgment table as described above, the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest for the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the super reach β fluctuation is set. The jackpot expectation of the pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach β fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach η fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is the jackpot expectation of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach λ fluctuation pattern is the super reach κ fluctuation pattern. It is set higher than the jackpot expectation of. As for the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern, as described above, since only the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is out of alignment is provided, the jackpot expectation is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in the feature unit 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Further, a first reserved storage display area 029SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 029SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 029SG005D and the second hold storage display area 029SG005U, the hold storage display for displaying the variable display hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game is displayed. .. In this feature unit 029SG, these hold displays can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display depending on which display mode the hold storage display is displayed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect (also referred to as a hold display advance notice effect) that makes the ratio controlled by the game state (big hit expectation degree) different.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 029SG, a meter 029SG005M capable of changing the display mode in 5 stages (6 stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed is included) is displayed as the meter effect described above. ..

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 029SG is a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-12, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 029SG151A, a second special drawing holding storage unit 029SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 029SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 029SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 029SG153, a game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A, a game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 029SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), it is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 029SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 029SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 029SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 029SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 029SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 029SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 029SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 has a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 029SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 029SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 029SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A of the feature unit 029SG, the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 11-20) is undecided. Whether or not, that is, when a new start prize is generated, a flag value is set according to the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the flag and the flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D and the second hold storage display area 029SG5U provided at the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (blue circle) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold storage display in a special mode (for example, blue circle or red circle) different from the normal display mode. ) Or "2" (red circle) is set, the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 029SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 029SG5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that was terminated immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 029SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" (step 029SGS102; N). Step 029SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 029SGS101b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" (step 029SGS105; N). Step 029SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS103 and step 029SGS106, the number of special figure reserved storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 029SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 029SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 can be used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 029SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 029SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step 029SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and then the process of step 029SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 029SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-16) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-17), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination processing of step 029SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 029SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 029SGS123). In the big hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets each judgment as the random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the big hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display. In that case, the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "missing", is executed (step 029SGS128), and whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, , It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 029SGS129). When the time reduction flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 029SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

Further, when it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that constitutes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and in the case of a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 029SGS133), selects and sets the jackpot variation pattern determination table (step 029SGS135), and steps. Proceed to 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are used. A variation category according to a range of determination values including the random value MR3 is determined (step 029SGS138). In this feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 029SGS138 is made to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 029SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 029SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Step 029 Following the processing of SGS142, the second special figure holding storage number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted higher one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 029SGS144), the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 029SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Just do it. As described above, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 029SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted higher one entry at a time (step 029SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 029SGS148), the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 11-3 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select a table and set it. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 029SGS150a). In this step 029SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , Step 029 In the process of SGS150a, the special figure display result using different determination data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 029SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the end of step 029SGS155, or when it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 029SGS150a; N), whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of () and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 029SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 029SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS164).

In the determination in step 029SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 029SGS161; N), the gaming state is probablely changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being performed in the state or the time reduction state (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 029SGS168; Y). Step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 029SGS168; N), for example, the storage of the reserved storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. By reading the value or the like, the reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 029SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 029SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 029SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation or the like is displayed. Based on this, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be obtained by referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, and loss variation pattern determination tables A to D. (Step 029SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 029SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach". That is, the process of step 029SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “missing”.

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 029SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special map games using the second special symbol (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 029SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step 029SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 029SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern It may be transmitted in the order of a designated command, a game state designation command, a first hold storage number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to end the variation. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 029SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step 029SGS184) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. , Hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designated command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored on the effect control board 12. Hit start 4 Make settings for transmitting the designated command (non-probability change) (step 029SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 029SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (Step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 029SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), in step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 029SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is reached. When is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 029SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low accuracy low base state) (step 029SGS195), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 029SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for displaying the big hit end on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. Is set (step 029SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 029SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time reduction flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), and the time reduction counter is set to "0". After setting (step 029SGS209), the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), by executing step 029SGS211 and step 029SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 029SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 029SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. Is determined by whether or not there is an entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242).

If there is no entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; N), the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; N). Y) Further, it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a loss (step 029SGS243). When the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 029SGS243; N), a jackpot not shown is shown based on the variable display result being a jackpot. By referring to the look-ahead notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead notice effect is executed (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A). Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in a blue circle in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D or the second hold storage display area 029SG5U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in a red circle in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D or the second hold storage display area 029SG5U. To.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), for example, the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 30%. Then, the execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect may be determined at a rate of 65%.

Further, in step 029SGS243, when the symbol designation command of the entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is the symbol designation command indicating the loss (step 029SGS243; Y). The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry is specified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 029SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 029SGS247. It's different.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), for example, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "non-reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. , The execution of the look-ahead notice effect display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "Other", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is performed at a rate of 20%. It is decided, and the execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "super reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is performed at a rate of 25%. The execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%.

When the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided by such a setting, the variable display result is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided, so that it is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display. Further, when the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a big hit when the look-ahead notice effect is executed by the display pattern β than when it is executed by the display pattern α. , It is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern the hold memory display, which is the target of the look-ahead notice effect, is displayed.

In the present feature unit 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the presence or absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern are determined at the same ratio regardless of the big hit type, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is a big hit, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern may be different depending on the big hit type. By doing so, the player can be controlled to which jackpot type jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed and which display pattern the hold memory display is displayed. It will be possible to draw attention.

After the execution of step 029SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined in step 029SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 029SGS249).

After the execution of step 029SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display as a blue circle, "1" is set in the hold display flag of the entry. If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display with a red circle, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252. ..

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 029SGS249 (step 029SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white circle (step 029SGS250). ), Proceed to step 029SGS252.

After executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the hold storage newly stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in the display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. To.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted higher by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are stored for each buffer number. Shift to a higher position (step 029SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, it is used as a stop symbol. , A plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. Determine the combination of symbols (missing symbols). If the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle symbol is medium. Determine the combination of reach misses (missing symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a meter effect determination process for determining whether or not the meter effect is executed and an effect pattern (step 029SGS277), and determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. Judgment (step 029SGS278). Whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern may be determined by whether or not the variation pattern specification command read in the process of step 029SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern.

If the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283, and if the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y). Further determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280).

When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS280; N), the variable is further changed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281). When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS281), and when the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS 281; N), The process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing the reach effect E development notification effect determination process.

In the process of step 029SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, when the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS 280; Y), branching is performed. A branch destination suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance suggestion effect is executed and an effect pattern is executed (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS285; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS289, and the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach ε or In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ (step 029SGS285; Y), the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not the reach effect G development suggestion effect is executed is executed (step 029SGS286). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the reach effect of the super reach to be executed during the variable display from the reach effect C and the reach effect D (step 029SGS287) according to the variable display result and the variable pattern, and the determination is made. A process table corresponding to the reach effect and the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the process of step 029SGS287, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PB1-4), the reach effect C The execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 50%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach θ (PB1-7), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 70%. If the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι (PB1-8), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PB1-9), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of the reach effect C is 90. It is determined at a rate of%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 10%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach ε (PA2-6), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 20%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach θ (PA2-9), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 30%. If the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed according to the fluctuation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. By determining at different ratios, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), the reach effect D is set higher than the reach effect C as the overall jackpot expectation.

Further, regardless of the variable display result, when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach ι (the variable pattern in which the reach effect H development notification effect and the reach effect H are executed after the execution of the advance effect and the precursor effect). As for, the execution of the reach effect D is always decided. On the other hand, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ (the fluctuation pattern in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the execution of the pre-effect and the precursor effect), the reach is executed. There are cases where the effect C is executed and cases where the reach effect D is executed.

That is, in the feature unit 029SG, regarding the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ) in which the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed during the variable display, the present feature is performed after the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed. The rate at which the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed in Part 029 (the rate at which the reach effect I with the highest big hit expectation is executed) is higher when the execution of the reach effect C is decided. Is set higher than when it is decided to execute. Therefore, in the feature unit 029SG, even if the reach effect C having a lower jackpot expectation than the reach effect D is executed during the variable display, the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed after the reach effect C. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the reach effect C is performed, the player recognizes that the jackpot expectation is low when the reach effect C is executed, and the game interest is reduced during the execution of the reach effect C. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and these from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), a comparison is made between the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the pre-effect, the precursor effect, and the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect are executed instead of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. In the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference of the super reach κ is 40%. The difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination ratio of the reach effect D in the variation pattern is set to 60%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (E), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is 40. The difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ is set to 20%.

Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ depend on whether the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. Whether the variable display is a variable display of the super reach κ in which the advance effect, the precursor effect, and the high expectation reach effect notification effect are executed from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, or as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Since it is possible to infer whether the reach effect G is a variable display of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified, the reach effect C and the reach effect D can be estimated. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which one is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a chance-up effect is executed, which suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) has increased during the variable display. Chance to determine the effect pattern of the up effect The up effect determination process is executed (step 029SGS289).

The effect control CPU 120 that has executed the chance-up effect determination process then starts a process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the process of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). ing.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 213SGS288). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13 (step 029SGS290).

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 029SGS292). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and determines whether or not the value of the process timer has timed out. do. Then, if the process timer is not timer-out, the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer is timer-out, the process data is switched and the next process is performed. The process timer may be started and the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data. By doing so, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the feature unit 029SG is executed.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS277 of FIG. 11-22 as the meter effect determination process. In the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 first has any of the variable display fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS301). When the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS301; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated. When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step). 029SGS301; N) determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β. , Super reach δ, Super reach ζ, Super reach η, Super reach λ (step 029SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not meter effect is executed according to the variation pattern. The effect pattern is determined (step 029SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach non-reach) fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 90%. The execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%. , The execution of the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%. do. When the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 25%, and the meter effect pattern B is determined. The execution in the meter effect is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution in the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect pattern is determined. The execution in E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%.

If the fluctuation pattern is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the meter effect pattern A is determined. The execution in the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 15%, the execution in the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 40%, and the meter effect pattern is determined. The execution in D is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 5%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in the pattern E of the above is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution in the pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in the pattern E of the above is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-24 (B) and 11-25, the pattern A in the meter effect is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (from the start of the variable display if it is a non-reach variable pattern without shortening). The meter 029SG005M is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step at the first timing during the variable display result notification (the period until the variable display result is notified), and the pattern B is the first timing and the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (non-reach variation without shortening). If it is a pattern, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (a total of two steps increases) at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of the variable display result. , Pattern C is the first and second timings, and the first in the period from the reach to the start of the reach effect of the super reach (in the case of a normal reach variation pattern, the period from the reach to the notification of the variable display result). This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at three timings (a total of three steps increase).

Further, in the pattern D, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing during the execution of the reach effect A or the reach effect B (a total increase of four steps). ) It is a production pattern. Further, in the pattern E, the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing (high expectation reach production start / stop) after the reach production A is being executed and the fourth timing is executed. This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (increases by a total of five steps) at a timing before the start timing of the notification effect. The pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by 5 steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the meter effect is determined after executing the process of the 029SGS303 (step 029SGS304). When the execution of the meter effect is not decided (step 029SGS304; N), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and when the execution of the meter effect is decided (step 029SGS304; Y), the determined meter effect effect pattern is stored. (Step 029SGS305), the meter effect start waiting timer according to the fluctuation pattern is set, and the meter effect determination process is terminated (step 029SGS306).

When the execution of the meter effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter effect start wait timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the value of the meter effect start wait timer is the timer. Determine if it is out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the meter effect has timed out, the process table for the meter effect is selected according to the determined effect pattern of the meter effect, and the process timer for the meter effect is started. After that, the value of the meter effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the meter effect process timer has timed out. If the meter effect process timer is not timer-out, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the meter effect process timer, and if the meter effect process timer is timer-out, the process data. To switch and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to execute the meter effect during the variable display.

As described above, in this feature unit 029SG, whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases up to 5 stages by executing the meter effect during the variable display, and the high expectation reach by increasing the meter 029SG005M up to 5 stages. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the production development production is executed.

FIG. 11-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. In the effect control E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). .. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach δ, the non-execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Reach production E The execution of the development suggestion production is decided at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the non-execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is 80%. Determined by the ratio of.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process of step 029SGS311 determines whether or not the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined (step 029SGS312). When the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS312; N), the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process is completed, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS312). Y) sets the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect E development suggestion effect and ends the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS313).

When the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach effect E development suggestion effect start waiting timer each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and reaches. It is determined whether or not the value of the timer for suggesting the development of the effect E has expired. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect E development suggestion effect has timed out, the process table for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is selected and the process timer for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is started. After that, the value of the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer has timed out. .. If the process timer for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is not timer-out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer, and the reach effect E development suggestion effect is performed. When the process timer is out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed is rather than the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach δ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed. Since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ, the reach effect E development is performed after the reach effect B is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of FIG. 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321). ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%. , The execution in the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. Determined at a rate of 0%. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ε, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 0%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 15%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 5%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 10%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 10%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is the execution of the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D in the image display device 5. It is an effect pattern that displays the branch destination suggestion image X that suggests both execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, and the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is the reach effect C or the reach effect D in the image display device 5. This is an effect pattern for displaying the branch destination suggestion image Y suggesting the execution of the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the above, and the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z is the reach effect C or the reach effect on the image display device 5. This is an effect pattern for displaying a branch destination suggestion image Z suggesting execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect during the execution period of D.

In the feature unit 029SG, among the patterns X to Z, the pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher ratio than the pattern X and the pattern Y when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. That is, the pattern Z is a production pattern having a higher expectation of execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect than the pattern X and the pattern Y (high expectation level of execution expectation of the reach effect development notification effect: pattern Z> pattern Y). , Pattern Z> Pattern X). Further, the pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than the pattern X and the pattern X when the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, that is, the pattern Y has a reach effect H higher than the pattern X and the pattern Z. This is an effect pattern having a high degree of expectation for execution of the development notification effect (reach effect H, degree of expectation for execution of the development notification effect: pattern Y> pattern Z, pattern Y> pattern X).

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and are determined according to the variable display result. The proportions are not different. That is, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern develop into one of reach effect G to reach effect I after the reach effect C and reach effect D are executed, and whether or not these reach effect G to reach are performed. Although it is determined according to which of the effects I develops, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the variable display are determined. The determination ratio may be different depending on both the variation pattern and the variable display result, or the determination ratio may be different depending only on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined by the process of step 029SGS321 (step 029SGS232). When the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and when the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS232; Y), the determined branch is executed. The effect pattern of the preceding suggestion effect is stored (step 029SGS323), the branch destination suggestion effect start waiting timer is set, and the branch destination suggestion effect determination process ends (step 029SGS324).

When the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggestion effect start wait timer every time the variable display effect process is executed, and starts the branch destination suggestion effect. Determines whether the value of the wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the branch destination suggestion effect times out, the process table for the branch destination suggestion effect is selected according to the determined effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect, and the process timer for the branch destination suggestion effect is started. Let me. After that, the value of the branch destination suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect process timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion effect process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the branch destination suggestion effect process timer, and the branch destination suggestion effect process timer is timed out. If so, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the branch destination suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in the feature unit 029SG, any one of the branch destination suggestion image X, the branch destination suggestion image Y, and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It is possible to draw the player's attention to switching to the pre-production without being notified of the variable display result as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Further, the advance effect is performed according to which of the branch destination suggestion image X, the branch destination suggestion image Y, and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Since the ratio of the reach effect H development notification effect being executed after the precursor effect and the ratio of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect being executed are different, the branch destination suggestion image X and the branch destination are displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the suggestion image Y and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed, and the game interest can be improved.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. In the effect control G development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the reach effect G development suggestion effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ε, the non-execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is 50%. The execution of the reach production G development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the non-execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is 80%. Determined by the ratio of.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process of step 029SGS331 determines whether or not the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined (step 029SGS332). When the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS332; N), the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process is completed, and the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS332). Y) sets the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect, and ends the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS333).

When the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect start waiting timer every time the effect process during variable display is executed, and reaches. It is determined whether or not the value of the timer for suggesting the production G exhibition has expired. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect has timed out, the process table for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is selected and the process timer for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is started. After that, the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer has timed out. .. If the process timer for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is not timered out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer, and the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is performed. When the process timer is out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the variable display in the super reach θ fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is executed is higher than the variable display in the super reach ε fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect G exhibition notification effect is not executed. Since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed at a rate, in the variable display with these super reach ε and super reach θ fluctuation patterns, the reach effect G develops after the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of FIG. 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern, the chance-up effect determination process is terminated. Further, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ (step 029SGS341).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach λ (step 029SGS341; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of the super reach λ (step). 029SGS341; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS 342).

When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS342; N), the variable is further changed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343). When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect A according to the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect pattern are determined (step 029SGS344).

Here, the contents of the effects in the reach effect A to the reach effect I in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-32 (A) to 11-32 (E). As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) to 11-32 (I), each of the reach effect A to the reach effect I includes a reach title display period for displaying the title of each reach effect on the image display device 5. After that, the image display device 5 is composed of a battle effect execution period for displaying the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character.

During the reach title display period of each of the reach effects A to I, the reach title can be displayed in red as a part of the chance-up effect (see FIG. 11-33 (A)).

Further, regarding the battle effect execution period of the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the movable body movable period in which the movable body 32 can be operated in the first half of the battle effect execution period and the cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5. There is a cut-in image displayable period, and as part of the chance-up effect, the movement of the movable body 32 during the movable body movable period and the display of the cut-in image during the cut-in image displayable period can be executed. (See FIG. 11-33 (A)).

Regarding the battle effect execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, a branch destination suggestion effect executeable period is provided after the movable body movable period and the cut-in image displayable period.

Further, regarding the battle execution period of the reach effect E and the reach effect F, a movable body movable period is provided in the first half of the battle effect execution period, and the latter half of the battle effect execution period (end of the battle effect). In the vicinity of the timing), an operation of urging the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in order to notify the variable display result according to the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in the image display device 5. Operation to display the promotion image A promotion image display period is provided. The operation promotion image display period is usually a period during which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature unit 029SG, during the battle execution period between the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the movement of the movable body during the movable body movable period and the image of the stick controller 31A during the operation promotion image display period as part of the chance-up effect. Can be executed (see FIG. 11-33 (B)).

The reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I are not provided with a movable body movable period, a cut-in image display period, and an operation promotion image display period. That is, the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I are reach effects in which the chance-up effect is not executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 of FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), when the variable display result is out of order, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 60%. Determined, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern R is 0. Determined at a rate of%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect A execution is determined (step 029SGS345). If it is not decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect A (step 029SGS345; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS347, and if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect A (step 029SGS345; Y). Stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for reach effect A according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach η (step 029SGS347). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α (step 029SGS347; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach η (step). 029SGS347; Y) determines whether or not the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is being executed and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern S is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern T is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern U is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern S of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in T is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F execution is determined (step 029SGS349). When the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is not decided (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect determination process is finished and the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is decided. (Step 029SGS349; Y) stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect F according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect determination process (step 029SGS350).

Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ in step 029SGS343 (step 029SGS343; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a reach effect according to the variable display result. B Whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution and the effect pattern are determined (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (C), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern P is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Q of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is decided at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect B execution is determined (step 029SGS352). If it is not decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect B (step 029SGS352; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS354, and if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect B (step 029SGS352; Y). Stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect B according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ζ (step 029SGS354). When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β or super reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ. In a certain case (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E execution and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (D), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 60%, and the chance-up effect pattern S is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern T is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern U is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern S of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in T is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is being executed is determined (step 029SGS356). When the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is not decided (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect determination process is finished and the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is decided. (Step 029SGS356; Y) stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for reach effect E according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect determination process (step 029SGS357).

Further, in the process of step 029SGS342, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS342; Y), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is one of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach ε (step 029SGS358).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS358; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is changed. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach ε (step 029SGS358; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is being executed and the chance up effect is executed according to the variable display result. The effect pattern is determined (step 029SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A), when the reach effect to be executed is the reach effect C, if the variable display result is out of order, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is 60%. The execution in the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern R is determined in. Determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (C), when the reach effect to be executed is the reach effect D, if the variable display result is out of order, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Q of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is 10%. Determined by the ratio of. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is decided at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D is determined (step 029SGS360). If the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D has not been decided (step 029SGS360; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated and the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D is being executed. When it is decided to execute (step 029SGS360; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored, and the chance up effect start timer for reach effect C or reach effect D is set according to the fluctuation pattern to determine the chance up effect. Is finished (step 029SGS361).

When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the chance-up effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and the chance-up effect start waiting timer is set. Determine if the value has timered out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the chance-up effect has timed out, the process table for the chance-up effect is selected and the process timer for the chance-up effect is started. After that, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the chance-up effect process timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect process timer is not timer-out, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the chance-up effect process timer, and if the chance-up effect process timer is timer-out. , Switch the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the number of times the chance-up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so whether the chance-up effect is executed or not. Whether or not it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Furthermore, in reach productions with relatively low expectation of big hits such as reach production A to reach production D, chance-up production is executed up to three times, so that chance-up production is performed during execution of reach production A to reach production D. It is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display result becomes a big hit effectively according to the number of times of execution.

On the other hand, in reach productions with high expectation of big hits such as reach production G to reach production I, the chance-up production that can be executed during the reach production is only once, so the chance-up production is performed multiple times. It is prevented that the performance of the reach production, which has a high expectation of a big hit, is lowered by the execution.

As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (E), among the effect patterns of the chance-up effect in the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the pattern P executes the red display of the reach title, but the movement of the movable body 32. The cut-in image display is an effect pattern that is not executed, the pattern Q is an effect pattern that executes the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 but does not display the cut-in image, and the pattern R is the effect pattern of the reach title. It is an effect pattern that executes all of the red display, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (F), among the effect patterns of the reach effect E and the chance-up effect in the reach effect F, the pattern S executes the red display of the reach title, but the movement of the movable body 32. The display of the image of the stick controller 31A is an effect pattern that is not executed, the pattern Q is an effect pattern that executes the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32, but does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, and the pattern R is an effect pattern. , The red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A are all the effect patterns.

As described above, as the chance-up effect of the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) to 11-34 (D), the chance-up effect as a whole in the reach effect A to the reach effect D is a chance increase. The jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the effect is non-execution, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is non-execution. There is. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern Q, the jackpot expectation is set higher than in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern P. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern R, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than that in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern Q (the big hit of the chance-up effect in the reach effect A to the reach effect D). Expectation: Pattern R> Pattern Q> Pattern P> Non-execution).

Further, as for the chance-up effect as a whole in the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the chance-up effect is not executed, and when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern S. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern T, the jackpot expectation is set higher than in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern S. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern RU, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern T (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F). Expectation: Pattern U> Pattern T> Pattern S> Non-execution).

Here, comparing the case where the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the case where the reach effect E or the reach effect F is executed, the pattern P and the pattern Q are common in the reach effect A to the reach effect D. While it is set as an effect pattern that can be executed in, the pattern R can be executed only when the reach effect B or the reach effect D is executed. That is, while the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be executed in any of the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed only in the reach effect B and the reach effect D. It is a production that can be performed.

Further, comparing the case where the reach effect E is executed and the case where the reach effect F is executed, in the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the pattern S and the pattern T are set as an effect pattern that can be executed in common. On the other hand, the pattern U can be executed only when the reach effect F is executed. That is, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed by either the reach effect E or the reach effect F, while the display of the stick controller 31A image as the operation promotion image is the reach effect F. It is a production that can only be performed in.

Next, the effect mode of the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-35 to 11-56. First, a case where the reach effect A is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. The meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as a state in which the number has not increased by one step. As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (when the execution in the pattern D or the pattern E is determined in the feature unit 029SG). (Disclosure), the meter 029SG005M is incremented by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, which is the timing before the reach, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when the reach effect A is started, first, the title image of the reach effect A and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect A are expected on the image display device 5. An expected degree image 029SG251 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG161A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect A, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG161B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect A.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect A is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (G), the battle effect by the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. As shown in FIG. 11-36 (H), the meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step at the fourth timing even during the battle production.

Further, during the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32. The operation toward the production position is executed. The operation of the movable body 32 as a chance-up effect is a movement from the origin position to the effect position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at an intermediate position between the origin position and the effect position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K). Is displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of the super reach α, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character A is defeated by the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect A) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A wins over the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect A) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image displayable period. The meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step (increased to five steps) and becomes full. Then, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 stages (full tank) and that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (R), the battle effect is interrupted in the middle, and instead of the battle effect, the high-expectation reach effect development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high-expectation reach effect development notification image. The display of 029SG180 is executed. Then, the reach effect F is started. The details of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect will be described later in FIGS. 11-55.

As shown in FIGS. 11-37 (S) and 11-37 (T), when the reach effect F is started, first, the title image of the reach effect F and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect A are expected on the image display device 5. The expected degree image 029SG256 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG166A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F, while any one of the pattern S, the pattern T, and the pattern U is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG166B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect F is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (U), the battle effect by the ally character B and the enemy character B is started. During the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern T or the pattern U, it is movable as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (V) and 11-36 (W). The operation (movement) from the origin position of the body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), the player is referred to the player in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not determined by the effect pattern of the pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image, while the effect pattern of the pattern U is used to produce the chance-up effect. When the execution is decided, the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period of these operation means ends, the battle effect is produced. The variable display result is notified as the effect result.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) out of the super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (a) and 11-39 (b), the battle As a result of the production, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character B to the enemy character B, and after the battle effect (reach effect F) is completed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off. To.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach η jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (c) and 11-39 (d), the battle effect is exhibited. As a result of the effect, when the ally character B wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect F) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Next, a case where the reach effect B is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. The meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as a state in which the number has not increased by one step. As shown in FIGS. 11-40 (A) to 11-40 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (when the execution in the pattern D or the pattern E is determined in the feature unit 029SG). (Disclosure), the meter 029SG005M is incremented by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, which is the timing before the reach, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40 (E) and 11-40 (F), when the reach effect B is started, first, the title image of the reach effect B and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect B are expected on the image display device 5. An expected degree image 029SG252 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG162A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect B, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG162B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect B.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect B is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G), the battle effect by the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. As shown in FIG. 11-41 (H), the meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step at the fourth timing even during the battle production.

Further, during the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32. The operation (movement) to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K). Is displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect B) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character B wins the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect B) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

When the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ or super reach ζ, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (P) and 11-42 (Q), after the end of the cut-in image displayable period When the ally character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order.

Then, after the battle effect (reach effect B) is completed, the swing display is performed in a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern. At this time, when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (R), as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, a decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so that the display positions overlap.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (S), the decorative symbol swings after the reach effect E development suggestion effect enableable period. It stops and is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (T), after the reach effect E development suggestion effect enableable period, the reach effect E development notification As the effect, the reach effect E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed. Then, the reach production E is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach effect E is started, first, the title image of the reach effect E and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect E are expected on the image display device 5. The expected degree image 029SG255 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG165A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect E, while any one of the pattern S, the pattern T, and the pattern U is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG165B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect E.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect E is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (W), the battle effect by the ally character A and the enemy character B is started. During the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern T or the pattern U, it is movable as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (X) and 11-43 (Y). The operation (movement) from the origin position of the body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (Z), 11-43 (a), and 11-43 (b), the player is referred to the player in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not determined by the effect pattern of the pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image, while the effect pattern of the pattern U is used to produce the chance-up effect. When the execution is decided, the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period of these operation means ends, the battle effect is produced. The variable display result is notified as the effect result.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) out of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (c) and 11-44 (d), the battle As a result of the effect, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character A to the enemy character B, and after the battle effect (reach effect E) is completed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the omission. To.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach ζ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e) and 11-44 (f), the battle effect is exhibited. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect E) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Here, the production mode of the reach effect E development suggestion effect from FIGS. 11-42 (Q) to 11-42 (T) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-45 (A) to 11-45 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the decorative patterns are oscillated in a combination indicating the detachment. In this state, as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the first stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player such as lower brightness and less display color than other images displayed in the display area such as a decorative pattern. It may be an image.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is completed, the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is once shown in FIGS. 11-45 (C) to 11-45 (D). After finishing the display of, the second stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second-stage reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first-stage reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170. Any image may be used as long as it is more visible to the player than the image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (E), the reach effect E development notification image in the image display device 5 is used as the reach effect E development notification effect. The display of 029SG181 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of alignment. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (F), the reach effect E development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect E development notification effect. Image 029SG181 is displayed and reach effect E is executed.

Next, a case where the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. When the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed as the reach effect of the super reach, the meter effect is not executed, so that the description of the period from the start of the variable display to the reach is omitted.

When the reach effect C is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A) to 11-46 (C), when the reach effect C is started, the reach effect C is first displayed on the image display device 5. The title image of the above and the expectation degree image 029SG253 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect C are displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG163A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect C, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG163B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect C.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect C is completed, the battle effect by the ally character C and the enemy character A is started as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (C).

On the other hand, when the reach effect D is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D) to 11-46 (F), when the reach effect D is started, the image display device 5 first performs the same. The title image of the reach effect D and the expectation degree image 029SG254 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect D are displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG164A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect D, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG164B whose title character is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect D.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect D is completed, the battle effect by the ally character D and the enemy character A is started as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (F).

Further, during the battle production of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, FIGS. 11-47 (G) and 11- As shown in 47 (H), the operation (movement) from the origin position of the movable body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (I) and 11-47 (J). Is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (K) to 11-47- (M), when the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, the cut during the battle effect of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. After the in-image displayable period, the reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) is executed on the image display device 5 as the branch destination suggestion effect, and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is executed. Branch destination suggestion image X (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X), branch destination suggestion image Y (branch destination suggestion image Y) suggesting that the development notification effect (reach effect H) is executed. 029SG005Y), or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) suggesting that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is executed is displayed.

After the branch destination suggestion effect executable period, if the variable display is a variable display with a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, FIGS. 11-48 (N) to 11-48 (P). ), When the reach effect C is executed, it is notified that the variable display is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character C by the enemy character A as a result of the effect of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed. If so, it is notified that the variable display is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character D by the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the decorative pattern is off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot, the reach effect is as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S). When C is executed, it is notified that the variable display is a big hit when the ally character C wins the enemy character A as the effect result of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed, the effect result of the battle effect. When the ally character D defeats the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display is a big hit. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the decorative pattern is off.

When the variable display is a variable display of super reach ε or super reach θ, the end of the branch destination suggestion effect execution period is as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (T) to 11-49 (V). Later, when the ally character C or the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order.

Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the swing display is performed in a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern. At this time, when it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (W), as the reach effect G development suggestion effect, a decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so that the display positions overlap.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ε, as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (X), the decorative symbol swings after the reach effect G development suggestion effect enableable period. It stops and is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach effect G development suggestion effect enableable period, the reach effect G development notification As the effect, the reach effect G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed. Then, the reach production G is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (Z), when the reach effect G is started, the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G and the expectation image 029SG257 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach effect G are first displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G is completed, the battle effect by the ally character C and the enemy character B is started as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (a) and 11-50 (b). .. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern (PA2-9) out of the super reach θ, as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (c) and 11-50 (d), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (e) and 11-50 (f), the battle effect is exhibited. As a result of the effect, when the ally character C wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Here, the production mode of the reach effect G development suggestion effect from FIGS. 11-49 (V) to 11-49 (Y) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (A) to 11-54 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the decorative patterns are oscillated and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment. In this state, as the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the first stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player such as lower brightness and less display color than other images displayed in the display area such as a decorative pattern. It may be an image.

Then, after the display period of the first stage of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (C) to 11-54 (D), the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is once used. After finishing the display of, the second stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second-stage reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is higher in brightness than the first-stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171, and has more display colors. Any image may be used as long as it is more visible to the player than the image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (E), the reach effect G development notification image in the image display device 5 is used as the reach effect G development notification effect. The display of 029SG182 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of alignment. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), the reach effect G development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect G development notification effect. The image 029SG182 is displayed and the reach effect G is executed.

When the variable display is a variable display with a fluctuation pattern of super reach ι or a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, the reach effect is as shown in FIGS. 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h). The shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-effect after the branch destination suggestion effect executable period during the execution of C or the reach effect D (from the left and right of the display area to the center of the display area). The shutter image 029SG006 is moved and displayed), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the execution period of the pre-effect is completed based on the elapse of the predetermined period, the shutter image 029SG006 is retracted from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left and right sides as a precursor effect. In response to the evacuation of the shutter image 029SG006, the image of the character C can be visually recognized by the player in the display area of the image display device 5.

When the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-51 (i), the reach effect H development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect H development notification effect. After the image 029SG183 is displayed, the reach effect H is executed. Further, when the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, as shown in FIG. 11-51 (j), the image display device 5 has a high expectation as a high expectation reach effect development notification effect. After the reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the reach effect I is executed. The details of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect will be described later in FIGS. 11-55.

When the variable display of the variable display is the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (k), when the reach effect H is started, the image display device 5 first performs the variable display. The title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H and the expectation degree image 029SG258 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect H are displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H is completed, the battle effect by the ally character D and the enemy character C is started as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (l) and 11-52 (m). .. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern (PA2-10) out of the super reach ι, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (n) and 11-52 (o), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-8) of the super reach ι jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (p) and 11-52 (q), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character D wins over the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Further, when the variable display of the variable display is the variable display of the variable display of the super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s), high expectation reach effect development When the reach effect I is started, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I and the expectation image 029SG259 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach effect I. At this time, the image display device 5 displays both the images of the characters A to C behind the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I and the expectation degree image 029SG259, so that the reach effect I is the other super reach. Produce a special feeling by having a higher expectation of big hits than reach production.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (t) and 11-53 (u), a battle effect by the ally character A to the ally character D and the enemy character C is performed. Is started. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern (PA2-11) out of the super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (v) and 11-53 (w), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character A to the ally character D are defeated by the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the display is out of order. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) of the super reach κ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the battle effect is displayed. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A to the ally character D win the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative pattern stops at the combination indicating the big hit. Is displayed.

Here, the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect from FIGS. 11-37 (R) to 11-37 (T) and 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s) will be described in more detail. ..

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to 11-55 (B), when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, the reach effect F or the reach effect is produced in the display area of the image display device 5. The high expectation reach effect development notification image 029SG180 that notifies that I is executed is displayed. Further, after the high-expectation reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see. Is executed.

In the blackout effect, the darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, which makes it difficult to visually recognize other effect images (variable display image of decorative pattern, character image, etc.), and the display screen itself. In addition to lowering the brightness of the image, the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lower than before the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect. Further, the amount of directing light of various light emitting means (for example, LED, etc.) provided in the game area, the movable body 32, the glass door frame, and the gaming machine frame 3 is set to the amount of the directing light before the execution of the high expectation reach directing development notification effect. By lowering the amount, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize other effect images (variable display image of decorative pattern, character image, etc.).

Then, after the blackout effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (C), an image of the character C is displayed as a pre-stage effect. Further, in the first stage effect, the dialogue content spoken by the character C is displayed as a character image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the dialogue is output as voice information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-55 (D) and 11-55 (E), the switching effect is executed after the end of the pre-stage effect, and the post-stage effect is executed after the end of the switch effect. As the switching effect, an image different from the image of the character C displayed in the previous stage effect is displayed. The feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which only one image is displayed as a switching effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of images is displayed as a switching effect. May be displayable. When any one of the plurality of images can be displayed as the switching effect in this way, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on which image is displayed.

In the subsequent effect, as described above, the dialogue spoken by the character is displayed as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the dialogue is output as voice information from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has a smaller number of characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed at the time of the previous stage production, while the size per character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see FIG. 11-10). ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-55 (F), after the end of the subsequent stage effect, the movable body effect is executed. In the movable body effect, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position, which is the upper position of the image display device 5, to the effect position overlapping with the substantially center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the effect position moves to the origin position by driving a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

Then, after the movable body effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (G), the reach effect according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach η, the reach effect). F. If the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect I) is executed.

Next, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-56 (A) to 11-56 (D), in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, first, when the variable display is started, at the second timing before the reach. The meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once and becomes full. Next, in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5, the telop image 029SG005T that informs that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 stages (is full) and that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed without becoming a reach or executing any one of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. It should be noted that the production mode of the high expectation reach effect development notification production is the same as the production mode described above in FIGS. 11-55. After the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-53, the reach effect I is executed, and finally it is notified that the variable display result is off or a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is the reach effect E development notification. The length of the effect execution period is set longer than L6b, and the reach effect E is executed after the reach effect E development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect E. For the length L11 until the notification is made, the reach effect F is executed after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect F. The length of the period up to L12 and the period from the start of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the execution of the reach effect I until the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect I. Since the length is set to be shorter than L13, when the reach effect E is executed after the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed, the period until it is notified that the variable display result becomes a big hit. However, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the excessive prolongation of the game. Further, in the case where the reach effect I is executed after the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, the player is preferably focused on the reach effect I until the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the r-value effect A, and is therefore longer than the reach effect A. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the reach production B over a period of time, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, the reach effect B is different from the reach effect A in that the development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result. Therefore, even if the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed, the player is surely paid attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect B. It is possible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when the meter effect is executed as an effect suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect during the execution of the reach effect A and the reach effect B. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed by the execution of the meter effect.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition, the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be suggested by the output mode of the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, and the like.

Further, in the present feature unit 029SG, an embodiment in which the meter effect can be executed only when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C and the reach effect are not limited to this. Even when D is executed, the meter effect may be executed. Especially in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, in which the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed from the middle of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. , A case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M is increased to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode for notifying the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect) triggered by the advance effect or the precursor effect. By doing so, whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage during the execution of the pre-effect or precursor effect by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at once at the second timing without going through the execution of the reach effect A. Since the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, even if the reach effect A is not executed, the player is asked to perform the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I. Since it can be noticed, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when the reach effect B is executed, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I may be executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention may be provided in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the reach effect B is executed. By doing so, even when the reach effect B is executed, the player can pay attention to whether or not the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed. You can improve your interest.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step from the first timing to the fifth timing as a meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M is not limited to this. A case may be provided in which the number is increased by two or more steps at any timing. Further, when the timing for increasing the meter 029SG005M by two or more steps is provided in any of the first timing to the fifth timing in this way, the meter 029SG005M is set at a timing before the reach effect A and the reach effect B are started. The rate of development to reach effect I may differ depending on whether the meter is increased to the fifth stage or the meter 029SG005M is increased to the fifth stage at the timing after the reach effect A or the reach effect B is started. Further, although the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the fifth stage as a meter effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect is the meter 029SG005M. The display mode may be changed in 4 steps or less or 6 steps or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the reach effect I is executed after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect I. The length of the period until the notification is L13 is from the start of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect until the reach effect F is executed and the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect F. Since the length of the period is set longer than L12, it is controlled to the big hit game state by lengthening the period until the effect result is notified when the reach effect I with a higher expectation of big hit is executed. It is possible to effectively raise the expectation that is given.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-25, the meter effect suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the feature unit 029SG is maximum from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. This is an effect in which the display mode changes step by step in 5 stages (6 stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed) is included. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-45, in the reach effect E development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the reach effect E in the feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes over two stages. It is a production that will be done. That is, in the present feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to 5 stages as the meter effect, but the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is 2 stages as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. Can only change up to. For this reason, in the meter effect, the image to be produced (meter 029SG005M) is more likely to change up to the 5th stage than the reach effect E development suggestion effect, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the 5th stage as the meter effect, while the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is changed to the 2nd stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be changed up to the fifth stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. In this way, when the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the fifth stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is up to the fifth stage. The rate of change may be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth stage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect enablement period can execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect. Since the length of the period is set longer than L6a, the reach effect E has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect A after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it can be suggested for a longer period of time than the reach effect E being executed after the execution of the development notification effect is suggested, the game entertainment can be improved.

The feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period L6a, but the present invention is limited to this. The length L5 of the meter effect feasible period may be set shorter than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect feasible period.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when the execution of the meter effect is determined, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when the execution of the meter effect is determined. Further, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the increase timing of the first stage.

Further, since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B, the reach effect E develops during the execution of the reach effect B. By executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by recognizing that the variable display result is not notified as a result of the effect of the reach effect B.

In the feature unit 029SG, as a pattern that develops from the reach effect B to the reach effect E, the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed after the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B. Although only the pattern to be performed (see FIG. 1-8 (F)) is disclosed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern that develops from the reach effect B to the reach effect E is the reach effect B. There may be a case where the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of. In this way, when the case where the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B is provided, the reach effect B is being executed. Reach production E The development suggestion production may be feasible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 to 11-34, the chance-up effect can be executed during the execution of the reach effect A to the reach effect F, and the chance-up effect is executed in any of the effect patterns. Expectations for big hits differ depending on the crab.

In particular, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η that executes the reach effect F after the reach effect A, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are performed twice in total during the execution of the reach effect A. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect, during the execution of the reach effect F, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image are performed. It is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect over a total of three times of image display. For this reason, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the number of executions of the effects constituting the chance-up effect increases when the reach effect F is executed rather than when the reach effect A is executed. It is possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the effect result of the effect F.

Furthermore, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the operation and cut of the movable body 32 are performed during the execution of the reach effect B. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect three times in total with the display of the in-image 029SG200, during the execution of the reach effect E, the reach title is displayed in red and movable as the chance-up effect. It is possible to execute an effect that constitutes a chance-up effect twice in total, including the movement of the body 32. For this reason, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the reach effect is produced because the number of times the effect constituting the chance-up effect is executed is smaller during the reach effect E than during the reach effect B. Since it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the production result of E, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the feature unit 029SG, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the movable body are displayed during the execution of the reach effect B. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect three times in total, the operation of 32 and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, while the reach effect E is being executed, the reach title is used as the chance-up effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the present invention. Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the effect B, the same number of effects that make up the chance-up effect can be executed during the execution of the reach effect E. May be.

In the feature unit 029SG, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are exemplified as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, light emission in a specific pattern of the game effect lamp 9, output of specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the light guide plate, and an image display device 5. The display of the light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) in the above, the operation of the image display device 5 itself, and the like may be included in the effect constituting the chance-up effect.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as the effects constituting the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image, etc. All of them illustrate the production (active production) that is executed regardless of the operation of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player constitutes the chance-up production. An effect (active) that is executed only when a player operates such as changing the emission color of the game effect lamp 9 by operating an operating means such as a push button 31B or a stick controller 31A (so-called back button). Direction) may be included.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9 and 11-30, the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ is executed. It is possible to determine the reach effect of the super reach to be performed from the reach effect C and the reach effect D having a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect C. Then, when the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed and the high-expected reach effect development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the reach effect is performed. When I is executed and the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of reach effect C or reach effect D, the reach with a lower expectation of big hit than reach effect I. Direction G is executed.

Further, when the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed and the reach effect H development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the reach effect I Since the reach effect H, which has a low expectation of a big hit, is executed, the effect can be diversified by combining the type of reach effect and the development notification effect.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, the ratios shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B) are used. By deciding whether to execute the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the precursor effect is executed when the execution of the reach effect C is decided than when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. Since the ratio of the reach effect I (high expectation reach effect development notification effect) to be executed after that is set high, the reach effect to be executed and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect have a predetermined relationship. It is possible to improve the production of reach production and development notification production.

Further, in this feature unit 029SG, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the super reach ε, the super reach θ, the super reach ι, and the super reach κ, the reach effect to be executed is determined from the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern for executing the reach effect C during the variable display and a variation pattern for executing the reach effect D during the variable display are individually specified. It may be provided in.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, the feature unit 029SG determines whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern at different ratios according to the variable display result. That is, the chance-up effect is the reach effect. As an example of the form executed as an effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit as the effect result of the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and during the effect period of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. As for the feasible chance-up effect, it may be feasible as an effect suggesting that any one of reach effect E to reach effect I is executed (development to any of reach effect E to reach effect I). ..

Furthermore, as a chance-up effect, in addition to the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit and one of the reach effect E to the reach effect I is executed, the big hit game when the variable display result becomes a big hit. It may be possible to suggest that the number of rounds is 10 rounds, that the game is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-9, when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, and after the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. When the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, the advance effect is executed because a common pre-effect can be executed during the period between the reach effect C or the reach effect D and the development notification effect. As a result, while raising the player's attention to the development notification effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the development notification effect is executed as the development notification effect, the high-expectation reach effect or the reach effect H development notification effect. You can improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9 and 11-27 to 11-28, the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Later, it suggests which of the reach production H development notification effect and the high expectation reach production development notification effect will be executed, and both the reach effect H development notification effect execution and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect execution. Since it is possible to execute the possible branch destination suggestion effect, while raising the player's attention to the fact that the development notification effect is executed by executing the development destination suggestion effect, the reach effect H development notification effect and High expectations Reach production It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the development notification productions is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in this feature unit 029SG, as the development destination suggestion effect, a form in which it is possible to suggest that the reach effect H development notification effect is executed and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest that the reach effect G development notification effect is executed as the development destination suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a development destination suggestion effect can be executed by a variable display of a variation pattern for executing the reach effect C or the reach effect C, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the variable display of the variation pattern for executing the reach effect A and the variable display of the variation pattern for executing the reach effect B, the development destination suggestion effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. The variable display result is a big hit for the fluctuation pattern of κ and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are executed after the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. When this happens, the difference between the rate at which the reach effect C is executed and the rate at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ is 60%, whereas the variation pattern of the super reach θ Since the difference between the ratio at which the reach effect C is executed and the ratio at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of is 40%, the reach effect I depends on whether the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. Is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which is executed, or a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect H is executed, so that the reach effect C and the reach effect can be inferred. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of D is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In the feature unit 029SG, when the variable display result of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is a big hit, the reach effect C is displayed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The difference between the execution rate and the reach effect D execution rate is the difference between the rate at which the reach effect C is executed and the rate at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in the case where the variable display result is out of alignment. The difference between the ratio to be performed and the ratio to execute the reach effect D is larger than the difference between the ratio to execute the reach effect C and the ratio to execute the reach effect D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. It may be set small.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a first reserved storage display area 029SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 029SG005U capable of displaying a reserved storage display are provided in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-57 as a modification 029SG-1, a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5). An active display area 029SG005F that can display the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display may be provided in the center).

Further, when the active display can be displayed in this way, a plurality of active display display modes are provided as in the above-mentioned look-ahead notice effect, and a big hit is expected depending on which display mode the active display is displayed. It may be possible to execute active display effects having different degrees. For example, when three types of active display display modes are provided, a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the display mode of the active display is displayed as a red circle, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It suffices if the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when it is displayed in a high, white circle (big hit expectation in the display mode of active display: red> blue> white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display can be changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the display mode of the active display is variable during execution due to the change of the red circle. It may be possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation of the display has increased.

When the display mode of the active display can be changed during the variable display in this way, as shown in FIGS. 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B), the variable display result is the effect result of the reach effect B. Regarding the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E is executed after the (missing) is once notified, the display mode of the active display is changed from the white circle or the blue circle during the execution of the reach effect E. The changing rate of the red circle is P1.

Further, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect A and the reach effect F is further executed, the active display is performed during the execution of the reach effect A. The rate at which the display mode of is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is P2, and the display mode of the active display is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red shape during the execution of the reach effect F. Let P3 be the rate at which the round shape changes.

At this time, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect F, is displayed as the active display during the execution of the reach effect E. The mode is P1 which is the rate of change from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle, and the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect A is from the white circle or the blue circle to the red. It may be set higher than P2, which is the rate of change to a round shape.

By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η (when the reach effect A is executed and the reach effect F is executed), the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is performed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be aware in advance that the reach effect F will be executed by changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle before the start. Further, in the case where the reach effect E is executed and the case where the reach effect F is executed, the display mode of the active display is a red circle at a higher rate in the reach effect F, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect E. By changing to, the display mode of the active display can be appropriately changed to a red circle according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the modification 029SG-1, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the display mode of the active display is changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the changing ratio P3 is higher than the ratio P2 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect A. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 029SG-2, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η as in the modified example 029SG-1, the display mode of the active display is white during the execution of the reach effect F. The display mode of the active display changes from the white round shape or the blue round shape to the red round shape while the reach effect A is being executed. In addition to setting the ratio higher than P2, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E. The ratio P1 may be set higher than the ratio at which the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect B.

In this way, a plurality of modes are provided as the active display mode, and the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the jackpot expectation. , The display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before the reach effect E development notification effect or the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, so that the player is recognized in advance that the jackpot expectation is high. It is possible to reduce the risk of deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ in which the high-expected reach effect development notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed without going through the reach effect such as the reach effect A and the reach effect B. However, as a modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display is changed from a white circle or a blue circle to red before the start of the reach effect I. The ratio P5 that changes to a round shape may be set higher than the ratio P6 that the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the reach effect I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle before the reach effect I is executed, the player is made to recognize in advance that the reach effect I is executed. Since it can be made easier, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In this modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the reach effect I. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the ratio P5 to be set is set higher than the ratio P6 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the reach effect I. Not limited to this, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the reach effect I. The ratio P5 may be set lower than the ratio P6 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the reach effect I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the reach effect I is executed without going through another reach effect even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle. It is possible to add unexpectedness to the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG and the modified example 029SG-1 to the modified example 029SG-3, three types of a white round shape, a blue round shape, and a red round shape are provided as display modes of the hold storage display and the active display. Although the embodiment in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the hold storage display or the active display is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage display or the active display is not limited to this. The number of display modes may be only two or four or more.

Further, in the modified examples 029SG-1 to the modified example 029SG-3, an embodiment in which the display mode of the active display can be changed during the execution of the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this and is active. The change timing of the display mode may include timings other than the execution of the reach effect, for example, the execution of the development suggestion effect and the development notification effect, the start timing of the variable display, and the like. Further, when it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect including a temporary stop and a re-variable display of a decorative symbol during the variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changed at the timing of the temporary stop or the re-variable display.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, three types of a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle are provided as display modes of the hold storage display, depending on which display mode the hold storage display is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. By providing a shape, etc., it is suggested which of the reach effects E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, and reach effect I will be developed depending on which shape the hold memory display is displayed. It may be possible. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process and determines that the fluctuation pattern (variation category) is super reach, which of the super reach α to super reach λ is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach? (Which of the reach effect A to the reach effect I is to be executed during the variable display) is determined, and the super reach variation category command (which super reach variation pattern is to be executed) according to the determination is included. The variable category command) may be transmitted to the effect control board 12. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the display mode of the hold storage table display from a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, a star, or the like based on the super reach variation category command received from the CPU 103. .. In addition, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the hold memory display even before the start of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-4, a form capable of suggesting a reach effect developed by the shape of the reserved storage display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the color of the reserved storage display is used. In addition to suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, the shape of the hold memory display may further suggest the reach effect of the development destination. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and the shape of the hold memory display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-4, a form in which the reach effect of the development destination can be suggested by the shape of the hold storage display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is developed by the shape of the hold storage display. The reach effect that can suggest the destination may be only a part of the reach effect E, the reach effect F, the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I (for example, only the reach effect E and the reach effect I). ..

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of the reach effect A to the reach effect F as a chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-5, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black may be changed to red in the middle as a chance-up effect. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect in this way, the display mode of the expectation degree image indicating the jackpot expectation degree displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example). , The number of stars displayed as an expectation image may be increased, etc.). By doing so, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the color of the characters in the reach title image changes from black to red, so that the attention to the expectation image can be increased. It is possible to make the player accurately recognize the degree of expectation of reach production.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Although the embodiment in which the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined is illustrated at the same ratio as in the case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach κ Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch destination suggestion effect are executed at different ratios depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It may be possible to determine the production pattern of.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-59 as a modification 029SG-6, before the variable display result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect C during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high expectation reach effect is executed, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be the reach effect C, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 15%. Determined, the execution in the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. Execution is determined at a rate of 35%. Further, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, when the reach effect to be executed is determined to be the reach effect D, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. The execution in the pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 40%. do.

In particular, in the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed (the non-execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower), the reach effect H is set during the execution of the variable display. It is possible to suitably suggest that the development notification effect such as the development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Although the embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set to be higher than that in the case where the above is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is obtained in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. When the execution of the effect C is determined, the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower than when the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. May be good.

In addition, in the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is performed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio in the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z (effect pattern suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect) is set higher than when it is determined, the variable display is being executed. In the above, it is possible to more preferably suggest that the development notification effect such as the reach effect H development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the super reach κ is exemplified, although the embodiment in which the execution decision ratio in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than that in the case of When the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of, the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is higher than the case where the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. The execution decision ratio may be set low.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 11-59, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch are performed at different ratios depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C or the reach effect D. It may be possible to determine the production pattern of the above-mentioned suggestion production.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-6, the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect C (the first advantageous result suggestion effect in the invention 033SG) and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect D. Although (the second advantageous result suggestion effect in the invention 033SG) is exemplified as an effect that can be executed as an effect of the same effect mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is being executed. The branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect D may be feasible as an effect of a different effect mode.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-9, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the reach effect E to the reach effect I can be selected. As for the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without development, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which any one of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the variable display result is notified is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-7, reach effect A to reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of super reach, and any one of reach effect E to reach effect I. Regarding the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into, in addition to the first notification mode, after being notified that the variable display result is once out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. A second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) may be provided in which the variable display result is notified as a big hit.

As described above, as the reach effect of the super reach, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. When the notification mode and the second notification mode are provided, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the first notification mode. The ratio is the same as the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. May be good.

In this way, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the second notification mode is a notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. By providing the above, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player by being notified again that the variable display result is a big hit even though the variable display result is once notified that the variable display result is out of order. Further, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect depending on whether the effect result (variable display result) when the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed is notified in the first notification mode or the second notification mode. Since the process for determining the above can be standardized, the amount of data required for the process can be suppressed.

In this modification 029SG-7, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as the modes, the branch destination suggestion effect is a pattern when the effect results (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the first notification mode. The ratio of the effect executed in Z and the ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode are Although the same embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and any one of the reach effect E to the reach effect I is performed. When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into, the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D is the first notification mode. The ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when notified in, and the branch destination when the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. The rate at which the suggestion effect is performed in pattern Z may be different.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. Regarding the modes, the first notification mode in which any one of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and the variable display result is temporarily removed as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the second notification mode in which the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. As -8, the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, and after being notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are performed. Is executed, and it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect G (when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ big hit). The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is variable in which the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. It may be different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed on the display. By doing so, when the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, the execution ratio of the chance-up effect depends on whether the reach effect G is executed before the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit. Because it is possible to make different games, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in this modification, the ratio of the chance-up effect being executed during the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is the second notification mode in which the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D is. Although a form different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is illustrated in the variable display notified in, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is in progress. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is the same as the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-27, the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed in a plurality of effect patterns, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed depending on which effect pattern the branch destination suggestion effect is executed. High expectations Reach production We have illustrated a form in which the rate at which the development notification production is executed differs. In particular, in the feature unit 029SG, the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed at the highest rate, but the present invention is limited to this. When the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be executed at an extremely high rate (for example, 99% rate).

In particular, in the case where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed at an extremely high rate when the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, the branch destination suggestion effect is the effect pattern. When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed even though it is executed in Z, or when the reach effect I is executed even though the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed (so-called). A pattern of production contradiction) may be provided. When such a pattern of effect contradiction is provided, the branch destination suggestion effect or reach effect I in the effect pattern Z is executed only when it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player, and when the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z or the reach effect I is executed, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is played, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (offset) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are further notified. Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the above is executed, an example is shown in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are different. Not limited to this, as in the modified example 029SG-10, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D may be the same for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. By doing so, in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect D is executed, the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Since the player can expect that the reach effect development notification effect is executed after it is performed, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 029SG-10, an embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are the same for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the variable display result is (missing) as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect D is executed. ) Is notified, and if it is possible to achieve an effect that the player can expect that the reach effect development notification effect is executed, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are achieved. Is small (for example, the difference between the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D. Are almost the same) and may be different.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (offset) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are further notified. For the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which is executed, the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect C is decided is smaller than the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-11, when it is decided to execute the reach effect C for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The jackpot expectation may be the same as the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect D is determined. By doing so, in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect is executed, when the reach effect G development notification effect is executed, the variable display result is obtained as the effect result of the reach effect G. Since the player can expect to be notified that the game will be a big hit, the game entertainment can be improved.

In this modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect C is decided and the jackpot when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. Although the embodiment in which the degree of expectation is the same is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is executed and the reach effect is executed in both cases. Reach if it is possible to produce an effect that the player can expect to be notified that the variable display result will be a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect G when the effect G development notification effect is executed. The difference between the jackpot expectation of the production C and the jackpot expectation of the reach production D is small (for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation of the reach production C and the jackpot expectation of the reach production D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the reach production. The jackpot expectation of C and the jackpot expectation of reach effect D may be substantially the same).

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the stick as the operation promotion image are used as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. The image of the controller 31A can be displayed, and the reach effect E development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect A to reach effect D, and the reach effect E development notification effect and high expectation are executed before the reach effect development notification effect. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be executed as a common effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F executed before the reach effect development notification effect. As a modification 029SG-12, a common effect of the red display of these reach titles and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the height. By doing so, while suppressing the increase in the number of effects that can be executed as the chance-up effect (the number of effect patterns of the chance-up effect), the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are the execution of either reach effect. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not he / she is squeezed inside, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect of the chance-up effect are different depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Although the form in which the pattern can be determined has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of execution of the chance-up effect and the effect pattern of the chance-up effect are any one of reach effect E to reach effect I. May be determined at different rates depending on whether or not is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as a modification 029SG-13, the high expectation reach effect development notification is made before the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Regarding the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the effect and the reach effect I are executed, the chance-up effect is performed at different ratios depending on whether the execution of the reach effect C is decided and the execution of the reach effect D is decided. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute. In particular, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, when the execution of the reach effect D is decided, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a higher rate than when the execution of the reach effect C is decided. When the execution of the reach effect D is decided, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, the second notification mode in which the variable display result is once again notified that the variable display result is a big hit after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. An embodiment in which (a so-called resurrection mode) is provided is illustrated, but as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (A) as a modified example 029SG-14, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order. After that, a revival effect may be executed to notify that the variable display result is a big hit between the variable display stop timing and the like.

In particular, when the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D (variation of any one of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ). When variable display is executed in the pattern and a big hit occurs), as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the effect period of the revival effect is set to reach effect. When the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect E are executed after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of B (variable by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ). The length of the period L22 from the start timing of the reach effect E development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (variable display result notification timing), and the effect results of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. When the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the reach effect G development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed after being notified that the variable display result is out of order (variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ). If the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G (variable display result notification timing) is set shorter than L23, the effect becomes redundant. It may be possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above (L22> L21, L23> 21).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the effect period of the revival effect is set from the start timing of the reach effect E development suggestion effect to the reach effect E development notification effect. By setting it shorter than the length L32 of the period until the end timing of, or the length L33 from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G development notification effect, the variable display result can be displayed. It is possible to give unexpectedness to the notification that it is out of order.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-14, a mode in which the revival effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is illustrated. When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect F are executed from the execution of the reach effect A (variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η and becomes a big hit). In the case), when the advance effect, the precursor effect, the reach effect H development notification effect, and the reach effect H are executed from the execution of the reach effect C and the reach effect D (variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι). When the reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed, the advance effect, the precursor effect, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, and the reach effect I are executed (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ). In the case where the display is executed and a big hit is obtained), a case where the revival effect is executed may be provided.

As shown in the feature unit 029SG, the ratio of the reach effect A to the reach effect D being executed and becoming a big hit (the degree of expectation of a big hit) is such that the reach effect F, the reach effect G, and the reach effect I are executed and the big hit. Since it is set lower than the ratio (big hit expectation), when the variable display result is a big hit, it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order as the effect result of reach effect A to reach effect D. By setting the ratio at which the revival effect is executed after that to be higher than the ratio at which the reach effect F, the reach effect G, and the reach effect I are executed and become a big hit, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed and variable. Even when it is notified that the display result is out of alignment, the player may be able to pay attention to the execution of the resurrection effect.

In addition, after the reach effect B is once notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect B, the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect E are executed to become a big hit. In the case (when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ and a big hit is obtained), or after being notified once that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G The revival effect is also executed when the development suggestion effect, the reach effect G, the development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed and a big hit is obtained (when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ and the big hit is obtained). A case may be provided, but in the case where the variable display is executed with these fluctuation patterns of super reach ζ and super reach θ, it is notified that the variable display result will be out of order once before the revival effect. In order to suppress the risk that the effect will be redundant and the game entertainment will be reduced by being notified twice or more that the variable display result will be out of order as the effect of the reach effect, super reach ζ or super If the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of reach θ and it becomes a big hit, the revival effect is not executed, or the fluctuation pattern of super reach α to super reach γ, super reach η, super reach ι super reach κ The revival effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the time can be controlled to a shorter time after the end of the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the variable display is executed is a specific number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.). ) May be controlled in a time-saving state, or in the case where the variable display result is out of order, it may be possible to control in a time-saving state according to the fact that some of the outliers are derived and displayed. good.

In particular, in this way, in the case of controlling the time saving state according to the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number of times, or in the case of controlling the time saving state according to the derivation display of a part of the deviation. , The high expectation reach effect development notification effect shown in the feature unit 029SG, or the effect of notifying that the time is controlled after executing the revival effect shown in the modified example 029SG-14 may be executed. .. By doing so, when controlling the time saving state according to the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number of times, or when controlling the time saving state according to the derivation display of a part of the deviation. , High expectation reach effect Whether it is controlled to a shorter time state by executing development notification effect or revival effect, or whether it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, reach effect with high expectation such as reach effect I Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is executed, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as the feature portion 029SG, an embodiment in which both the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG are carried out is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and only one of the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG is carried out. You may try to do so.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the description below but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. Execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including reach effect A), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). Possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η). In the variable display, the portion where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), the special development after being notified that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect B (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), which is the part where the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the loss) is once notified.
The development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect is shown in the figure. The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in 11-23, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in 29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed). ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of ζ, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the reach effect E is further executed).
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect longer than L6b),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result). The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F are the reach effect E development notification effect start timing to the reach effect E end timing ( The length of the period until the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than L11),
Moreover,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display and an active display) corresponding to a variable display, and
A portion for displaying the specific display effect (for example, the hold display or the active display in any of the display patterns α to the display pattern γ) based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the occurrence of a start winning prize). ), A specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and an effect executing means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute the effect.
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 15). -28, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), before the display of the hold display is completed. The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. In that case, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body). Including lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term). The second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of late winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness C1 and The part that blinks in the cycle T1 and blinks in the luminance C2 and the cycle T2 during the flash effect execution period at the time of the late winning).
The second light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a mode corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-28). As shown in, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the luminance C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. The portion that blinks at the luminance C2 and the cycle T0 during the period), the gaming machine, and the like.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and in the first period of the specific light emission effect, the first Not only the 1 light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can be made to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. Is even easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, it is possible to prevent the period until it is notified that the control is controlled to the advantageous state to be excessively long, and depending on the type of the development effect, the length of the effect period and the advantageous state after the development effect is executed. The period until it is notified that it is controlled changes, and the development effect and the notification that it is controlled to the advantageous state are executed in the effect period of an appropriate length according to the type of the development effect. It is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game when it is installed in the amusement park and that the production is easy for the player to understand and be interested in.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of making it easier for a player to recognize a specific display by using a light emitting means and improving the interest, a variable display can be executed, which is an advantageous state for the player. A gaming machine that can be controlled (for example, a jackpot gaming state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display and an active display) corresponding to a variable display, and
A portion for displaying the specific display effect (for example, the hold display or the active display in any of the display patterns α to the display pattern γ) based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the occurrence of a start winning prize). ), A specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and an effect executing means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute the effect.
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 15). -28, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), before the display of the hold display is completed. The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. In that case, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body). Including lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term). The second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of late winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness C1 and The part that blinks in the cycle T1 and blinks in the luminance C2 and the cycle T2 during the flash effect execution period at the time of the late winning).
The second light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a mode corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-28). As shown in, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the luminance C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. The portion that blinks at the luminance C2 and the cycle T0 during the period), the gaming machine, and the like. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example of the form.

(Example of other forms)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display and being able to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display and an active display) corresponding to a variable display, and
A portion for displaying the specific display effect (for example, the hold display or the active display in any of the display patterns α to the display pattern γ) based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the occurrence of a start winning prize). , Specific display start effect), specific light emission effect for causing the light emitting means to emit light (for example, flash effect at the time of winning), and effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the specific display start effect.
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 15). -28, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), before the display of the hold display is completed. The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. In that case, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body). Including lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term). The second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of late winning to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness C1 and The part that blinks in the cycle T1 and blinks in the luminance C2 and the cycle T2 during the flash effect execution period at the time of the late winning).
The second light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a mode corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-28). As shown in, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the luminance C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part that blinks at the luminance C2 and the cycle T0), is characterized by @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect is achieved. In the above, not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, and therefore, it is the target of the specific light emitting effect. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The specific display effect is an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. 15-15, 15-30 (D) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (B)) in which the appearance effect of the specific display is executed. As shown in FIGS. 15-50 (D), a portion where an appearance animation in which a hold display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed by executing a specific display start effect execution process by the effect control CPU 120. ) And the periodic effect unit (for example, FIGS. 15-15, 15-30 (D) to FIG. As shown in 15-32 (H) and 15-49 (B) to 15-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific display rotation display effect execution process to display a hold display or an active display. Is displayed as a rotation animation) and consists of
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the start timing of the periodic effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 and 15-20, from the timing at which the appearance animation of the hold display or the active display is completed. The part where the rotation animation of these hold display and active display starts)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's attention to the specific display can be increased.

The gaming machine of the third form is the gaming machine according to the first form or the second form.
The effect executing means can start the specific light emitting effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), the specific display. When executing the start effect B, the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body as the flash effect at the time of winning from the timing before the start of the display of the hold display or the active display. The part where the lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the specific light emitting effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third embodiments.
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect).
The display means has a specific display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which the specific display is displayed in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a hold display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top), and the character A is first held. It can be displayed in the specific display start effect B) that executes the appearance animation in which the hold display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top after acting on the storage display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A.
The period of the appearance effect differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds).
The specific light emitting effect is started before the end timing of the appearance effect in the shortest period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D)). , The flash effect at the time of winning is the part that starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can surely display the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. Can be recognized.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments.
The effect executing means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state (for example, FIGS. 15-28, 15-29 (A), FIG. As shown in 15-29 (B), 15-49 (A), and 15-49 (B), when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is once decided. , Main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d are turned off)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
The "low-luminance state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low brightness but also a state in which light is not emitted.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The effect executing means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in the modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image is once displayed. A part where the flash effect at the time of winning is started after the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In the "low visibility state" in the present invention, if the visibility of the display means is lower than that of the immediately preceding state, the visibility of the display can be improved by a method other than the reduction of the brightness of the display means. Including the lowered state.

The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled in an advantageous state, and when the suggestion effect is being executed and the suggestion effect. The specific light emission effect can be executed when the above-mentioned specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-48 (n), FIGS. 15-49 (A) to 15-68 (FIG. 15-68). As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
Variable display compatible sound corresponding to variable display (variable display compatible sound shown in FIGS. 15-28), suggestion effect compatible sound corresponding to the suggestion effect (notice effect compatible sound shown in FIG. 15-29 (A)), and A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect compatible sound shown in FIG. 15-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect is provided.
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed when the variable display compatible sound is output, the specific light emission effect compatible sound can be output in preference to the variable display compatible sound being output (for example,). As shown in FIG. 15-29 (B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the variable display compatible sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs the sound at the volume V1 (V1> V2)),
When the specific light emission effect is executed when the suggestion effect corresponding sound is output, the specific light emission corresponding sound can be output with priority over the suggestion effect corresponding sound being output (for example,). As shown in FIG. 15-29 (B), when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the flash effect at the time of winning is supported. The part that outputs the sound at the volume V1 (V1> V2))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if a variable display compatible sound or a suggestion effect compatible sound is output, it becomes easier to hear the specific light emission effect compatible sound, and the player executes the specific light emission effect by outputting the specific light emission effect compatible sound. It will be easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided.
In the specific light emission effect, the effect executing means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect from the sound output means before either the display completion of the specific display or the light emission of the light emission means (for example, FIGS. 15-28). As shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H) and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined according to the starting winning. If this is the case, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning will start blinking after the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the hold display and the active display will be completed).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect allows the player to quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the hobby of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting sound is provided.
The effect executing means is used in the specific light emission effect.
It is possible to output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect from the sound output means (for example, the part where the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The light emitting means is made to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-12, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning according to the start winning prize. If is determined, after the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the hold display and the active display is completed).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the light emission of the light emitting means allows the player to quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode according to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and the first light emitting means is emphasized more than the predetermined mode in the second period. It is an effect that emits light in a specific mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first half, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is blinked at the brightness C1 to win the second half. During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part where the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is blinked at the brightness C2 (C1> C2))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, at least the first light emitting means can be made to emit light in a predetermined mode so that the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined mode even in the second period. It is possible to prevent the game from being deteriorated as an obstacle to other productions due to the light emission.
The "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed and a period during execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 15-28). As shown in, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the execution period of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. The part including the period),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific mode before and after the start of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to Form 10 or Form 11.
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined mode when the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emitting effect, is started (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-13, the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. When a certain variable display is started, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is blinked at the luminance C1 and the period T1).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to the twelfth forms.
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first display mode in the first period, and displays the image corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the second display mode from the first display mode. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first half, and the second prize is won. During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the portion displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emitting effect by the display means in the first display mode in the first period, and display in the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect by the means in the second display mode, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, which hinders other displays and makes the game fun. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

The gaming machine of the form 14 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 13.
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in the modification 135SG-13). When the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is started, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 14.
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect corresponding to the specific light emission effect is provided.
The sound output means outputs the specific light emission effect compatible sound in the first output mode in the first period, and does not output the specific light emission effect compatible sound in the second period, or is stronger than the first output mode. Output in the second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1. During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at the volume V2 (V1> V2)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission effect has been started, and the specific light emission effect can be easily recognized. During the execution of, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. ..

The gaming machine of the form 16 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 15.
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-13). In addition, when the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is started, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the 17th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th forms.
The first light emitting means stops light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-69 as a modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command during execution of the flash effect at the time of late winning, and is based on the fact that the speaker 8L, 8R is used. The design is confirmed by stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turning off the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hiding the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clearing the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, by selecting the late winning flash effect process table and resetting and starting the process timer for the late winning flash effect, the late winning flash effect (flash at the time of winning) is performed according to the start of the new variable display. Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 17th forms.
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emitting effect at the temporary stop when the revariable display effect executed in the second period before the variable display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect is started. It is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, as shown in FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (A) to 15-89 (n) as the modified example 135SG-1. During the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol in the variable display executed before the variable display, the luminance C2 and the period T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning are continuously blinking).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of the form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 18.
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (A) as the modified example 135SG-1. ) ~ As shown in FIGS. 15-89 (n), the portion where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the luminance C1 and the cycle T2 even during the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect).
Even in the temporary stop when the revariable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission is continued in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as a modification 135SG-1). As shown in FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (A) to 15-89 (n), the flash at the time of winning is during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol during the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Luminance C2 of lamp 135SG009F and continuous blinking of period T2),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 18, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of the 20th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th embodiments.
The first light emitting means continues to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the variable display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect is started. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-48 (n), during the execution of the late winning flash effect, the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started. In the previous variable display symbol confirmation period, the part where the flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink at the time of winning),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the light emission is controlled to an advantageous state by continuing the light emission even during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period is the target of the specific light emission effect. It can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 21st embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 20th embodiment.
In the display means, variable display of the first effect identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) and variable display of the second effect identification information (for example, a small symbol) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information can be executed. It ’s a game machine,
In the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 (J), the small symbol is variably displayed in the symbol determination period. The part displayed when is stopped),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the result display period is reached.

The gaming machine of the form 22 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 21.
The display means can display the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 15-33 (J)). As shown in the above, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 while the flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, while the small symbol 135SG005M is the first image display device 5. 1 Display area 135SG005F (displayed at the left end),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the end of the variable display because the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect is duplicated in the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to the 22nd forms.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) suggesting that the effect is controlled in an advantageous state.
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect until the specific effect is started, and the specific effect is specified. When the effect is started, light emission is started in a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-90 as a modification 135SG-2, the variable super reach that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is variable. In the display, before the start of the reach effect of the super reach, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is blinked at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and from the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is at the brightness C2. The part to light up),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific effect instead of the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the game entertainment of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 24th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment.
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 15-96 (K) to 15-98 (O)). , As shown in FIGS. 15-104 (K) to 15-106 (O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout)).
The first light emitting means becomes a low-luminance state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and after the display becomes the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 15-90, during the whiteout period, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned off, and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned on at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach production of the super reach). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low luminance state accompanying the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emitting mode gives the player a sense of discomfort. Since it can be prevented, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to the 23rd or 24th form.
A movable body (for example, a movable body 32) is provided.
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an operation effect for operating the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, a movable body operation effect shown in FIGS. 15-90) and execution of the operation effect. The motion suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-90) can be executed.
The first light emitting means becomes a low-luminance state when the operation suggestion effect is executed, and after the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the operation effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example,. As shown in FIGS. 15-90, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned off during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect during the whiteout period, and the flash at the time of winning is started from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of the super reach. The part that lights the lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low luminance state accompanying the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to these changes in the light emitting mode. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 25th forms.
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emitting effect is executed by the effect executing means, light can be emitted in a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, as a modification 135SG-3, FIG. 15-108 (A) is shown. As described above, when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the part where the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning can be turned on in the manner corresponding to the step-up effect).
When the specific light emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in preference to the mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, Modification 135SG-3). As shown in FIG. 15-108 (B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the winning flash effect is executed, the winning flash lamp in the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect. The part where the lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F continues),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of the 27th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 26th forms.
The light emission of the first light emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect is when it ends at the first timing in the variable display which is the target of the specific light emitting effect and at the second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-119 (A) and 15-119 (B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect. The timing to end the light emission mode includes the timing to start the movable body motion effect during the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the reach effect of the super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in the mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect is completed at the second timing. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different from that at the end (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 (C) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the winning flash effect. From the light emission mode according to Is different),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be focused on the timing at which the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 28th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 27th embodiment.
The effect executed by the effect executing means at the time of the end differs between when the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 as a modified example 135SG-4, during the execution period of the movable body motion effect according to the timing of ending the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. (In some cases, it may be during the execution period of the reach production of Super Reach),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of the form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 28.
The effect executing means has a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIG. 15-119 as a modified example 135SG-4) and a second effect (for example, a modified example 135SG) different from the first effect during variable display. As -4, the reach effect of the super reach shown in Fig. 15-119) can be executed.
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission in the mode according to the first effect (for example). As shown in FIG. 15-119 (A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body operation effect from the start timing. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the operation effect),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission in the mode according to the second effect (for example). As shown in FIG. 15-119 (B) as a modified example 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect).
When the light emission of the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is changed to the light emission of the mode according to the first effect, and the light emission of the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is changed to the light emission of the mode according to the second effect. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 (C) as the modified example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F depends on the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on whether the light emitting mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement effect to the light emitting mode according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the effect performed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 28.
A movable body (for example, a movable body 32) is provided.
The effect executing means controls an motion effect for operating the movable body (for example, a movable body motion effect) and an action suggestion effect suggesting execution of the motion effect (for example, a movable body motion suggestion effect) in an advantageous state. It is possible to perform a specific effect that suggests that it will be done (for example, a reach effect of super reach).
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the operation suggestion effect during the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from the light emission of the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the mode according to the operation suggestion effect (for example, a modification). As shown in 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode according to the movable body operation suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect. Part to change),
With the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission in the mode according to the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification). As shown in 135SG-4, a portion that changes the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode according to the reach effect from the start timing of the super reach reach effect. ),
The ratio controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the mode changes from the light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission according to the operation suggestion effect or the light emission according to the specific light emission effect (for example). As shown in the modified example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F was changed from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body operation suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect. The part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on whether the light emitting mode is set or the light emitting mode is set according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the effect performed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 30.
As the display mode of the specific display, a normal mode (for example, display pattern α), a special mode (for example, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 15-120 as the modified example 135SG-5) and a special mode (for example, a display pattern). There are β and display pattern γ),
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, a display pattern γ) and a second special aspect (for example, a display pattern β) different from the first special aspect.
When the specific display is displayed in the first special aspect, the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIGS. 15-17). As shown in, when the hold display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the part controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special aspect can be changed to either the first special aspect and the second special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 as the modified example 135SG-5, the display pattern δ or the like. The part where the hold display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the hold display or active display of the display pattern β or display pattern γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of executing the specific light emitting effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, FIG. 15- as a modification 135SG-5). As shown in 120, when the hold display or the active display is displayed by the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the prize is won both when the hold display or the active display is displayed by the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The part where the time flash effect is executed is high),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the specific light emitting effect is executed at a high rate, so that the special mode changes to the first special mode or the second special mode. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the game and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the form 32 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 31.
The special aspect is an aspect of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIG. 15-120 as a modification 135SG-5).
The special aspect is an aspect of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIGS. 15-17).
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white).
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, variant 135SG-5). As shown in, when the hold display or the active display is displayed by the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. The part where the rate of change to pattern β or display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in the color, and the player pays attention to whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed when the specific display of the specific color is displayed. It can be made to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the form 33 is the gaming machine according to the form 31 or the form 32.
The effect executing means can execute a change suggestion effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special aspect changes to the special aspect in the first aspect and the second aspect different from the first aspect. (For example, a part in which the first action effect and the second action effect shown in the modified example 135SG-5 can be executed).
The special aspect changes to the special aspect at a higher rate when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect than when it is executed in the first aspect (for example, variant 135SG-5). As shown in, the second action effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first action effect by acting on the specific display displayed by the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the rate at which the specific light emission effect is executed is higher than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect (for example, in the modified example 135SG-5). As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is executed at a higher rate than when the first action effect is executed),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether the change suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect or the second aspect, and the change suggestion effect is the first by executing the specific light emission effect. It is possible to increase the expectation that it will be carried out in two modes.

The gaming machine of the embodiment 34 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 33.
In the special aspect, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. 15-120 as a first special aspect (for example, modified example 135SG-5, in which the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect and the rate of change to the special aspect is low is low). ) And the second special aspect (for example, modified example 135SG-5, FIG. 15-120) in which the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect and changes to the special aspect is higher than that of the first special aspect. Including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of executing the specific light emitting effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, the specific display is displayed. When the display pattern ε is displayed, the ratio of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than when the specific display is displayed by the display pattern δ),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light emitting effect is executed at a high rate, the expectation that the specific display is displayed in the second special mode can be increased by executing the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of the form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 34.
The display means can display the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect (for example,). As shown in the modified example 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the specific light emission effect compatible display, so that the player can be surprised and enjoy the game. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 36 is the gaming machine according to the form 35.
The display means can display a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect of different types (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-7, the image display device 5 has a different size as a flash effect at the time of winning. The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The overlapping mode with respect to the specific display differs depending on the type of the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-129 (L) and 15-130 (N) as a modified example 135SG-7). , The overlapping mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a plurality of specific light emitting effect compatible displays are displayed, and the overlapping mode with the specific display changes depending on the displayed specific light emitting effect compatible display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 37 is the gaming machine according to the form 35 or the form 36.
The specific display includes a first specific display (for example, a hold display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (for example, an active display) corresponding to a variable display that is being executed.
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap with the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to display so as to overlap with the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in the modification 135SG-7). Before the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the hold display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. , The part that displays the silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in the active display area 135SG005A during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific light emission effect compatible display hides not only the first specific display but also the second specific display. Therefore, it is possible to further give the player unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 37.
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The display means can display the revariable related display related to the revariable display effect, and the specific light emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the specific light emitting effect is duplicated with the revariable related display. (For example, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the image is stopped in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. A silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning a special symbol (see Fig. 15-40, etc.) that can be displayed in duplicate),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the revariable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the player can be surprised and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 35 to 38.
The display means can display the specific light emission effect compatible display even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 15-28, 15-42 (a) to 15-47 (Fig. 15-47). As shown in l), the portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 40th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 39th embodiments.
The effect executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means is continuously made to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and a predetermined end before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect is completed. It is possible to control the effect of ending the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, during the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F before the start of the reach effect. Blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and turns off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the start timing of the reach effect).
When the light emission of the mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of the first light emitting means is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is performed at the specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. A special end control for terminating the light emission of the light emitting means is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-22, it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it cannot be done, the flash effect at the time of the second prize including the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is again at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the symbol confirmation command) which is the timing after the start timing of the reach effect. The part that ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort when the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not normally terminated.

The gaming machine of the embodiment 41 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 40.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided.
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of the variable display to the effect executing means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (A)). , The part where the CPU 103 can send a symbol confirmation command that specifies to stop the variable display of decorative symbols),
The effect executing means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the symbol. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of late winning based on receiving the command),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the discomfort when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of the form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 39 to 41.
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, at the time of winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the reach effect. Flash lamp 135SG009F can end blinking),
The specific end timing is a timing after the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 is used for flashing at the time of winning due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the reach effect. The part that ends the flash production at the time of the second prize),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if it cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, it is possible to end the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of the form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 42.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, the first start is performed during the execution of the reach effect of the super reach. If a start-up prize occurs in the mouth, the part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to a decrease in the attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 43.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is the same as or shorter than the predetermined period, the effect executing means does not execute the specific light emitting effect, and the remaining period of the variable display is the said. If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-8, the first starting port is reached during the execution of the variable display. When a start winning is generated, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand by executing the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of the form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 44.
The effect executing means is
A specific effect suggesting that the variable display is controlled in an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-9, even in a variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment. The part where the reach production of Super Reach can be executed),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect in the variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed according to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, modification). As shown in Example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first starting port occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of the previous term winning. If it is less than or equal to the execution period, the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display on condition that the variable display result of the variable display is out of order).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific effect and the specific light emission effect from being reduced in interest due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of the form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 45.
A specific region (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming the first starting winning opening) where the predetermined condition is satisfied by passing the game medium, and
A specific light emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light emitting modes, and
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any of a plurality of display modes having different ratios of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-17, hold display or active display. The part that can be displayed by any of the display patterns α to the display pattern γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emitting effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28). When the display of the start port lamp 135SG009S is determined to be displayed in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the start port lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like as a winning flash effect. From the occurrence of the prize to the end of the variable display based on the start prize (the part that emits light in the color corresponding to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can be recognized by the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 47 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 46.
The number of light emitting modes that the specific light emitting means can emit light is larger than the number of light emitting modes that the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-9). The number of light emitting modes of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emitting effect is provided to be larger than the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since there are many light emission variations of the specific light emitting means, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the form 48 is the gaming machine according to the form 46 or the form 47.
The light emitting region of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting region of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting region in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect is provided. , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emitting effect).
During the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of 1, the first light emitting means responds to the specific light emitting effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is used after the start winning is generated, if it is decided to execute both the flash effect at the time of winning and the hold display advance notice effect based on the start winning. While the light is emitted until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display, which is the target of the start winning flash effect, the start port lamp 135SG009S has a variable display (flash effect at the time of winning), which is the target of the hold display notice effect after the start prize occurs. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display), which is the target of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an advantageous state depending on the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means while preventing a decrease in the interest of the game due to the light emission corresponding to the specific light emitting effect by the first light emitting means being executed for an excessively long time. The expectation of the player can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of the form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 46 to 48.
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means can blink and emit light (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, a portion where the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning can blink and a modified example 135SG-10. As shown in, the part where the start port lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking cycle of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking cycle of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-10, the blinking cycle of the start port lamp 135SG009S is used for the winning flash as the winning flash effect. The part that differs from the blinking cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the blinking cycle is different, the player can be focused on both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of an ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric parts including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting an alternating current (AC) into a direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 13 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 13 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as the "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is a probable change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is a game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the ratio of the gaming ball passing through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 135SG)
Next, the feature portion 135SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 135SG. As shown in FIG. 15-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and the winning ball device 6A. In the vicinity of, a start port lamp 135SG009S for causing the winning ball device 6A (first start port) to emit light is provided.

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for causing the stick controller 31A to emit light is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for causing the push button 31B to emit light is provided in the push button 31B. The stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135Sg009Y together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d described above constitute the game effect lamp 9 in the feature unit 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 15-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the start port lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. It can be lit (blinking) by the control from the CPU 120.

FIG. 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device 5 in the feature unit 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 135SG005D capable of displaying the first special figure reserved storage number by the number of circular reserved displays, and a circular reserved display of the second special figure reserved storage number. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of telops, a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect being executed, and the like is configured.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 includes a fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variablely displayed, a display of the first special symbol reserved storage number, and a display of the second special symbol reserved storage number. 3 Display area 135SG005Sb is configured.

Of these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F, and variable display of decorative symbols can be executed. It has become. Further, a small symbol 135SG005M having a size smaller than that of each decorative symbol is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small symbols are the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left", the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C in "middle", and the decorative symbol display area on "right". The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols displayed on the 5R are vertically arranged in parallel. Further, the small symbol 135SG005M is not hidden during the variable display, and is also a symbol displayed in the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 at all times.

In the feature unit 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-3, a decorative symbol is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 135SG005M is the second image display device 5. 1 At the left end of the display area 135SG005F, the size is smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the feature unit 135SG, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display is provided.

Hereinafter, in the feature unit 135SG, the hold display and the active display may be collectively referred to as a specific display.

FIG. 15-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 15-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the big winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit state described later. ..

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", a judgment result of a big hit type (probability change or non-probability change), and a small hit as a winning judgment result. .. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for the variation pattern determination is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 15-4 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 15-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 15-5, in the feature unit 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. 15-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 15-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 135SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 135SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 135SG, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 135SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 135SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 15-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes It is a table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 135SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result judgment table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is generated in the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. In a high base state where a game ball can easily enter the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 15-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 135SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 135SG will be described with reference to FIG. 15-7 (B). In the feature unit 135SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). .. Further, in the big hit game state by "probability change big hit C" and "non-probability change big hit", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is a probability variation jackpot, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state continuously occurs without going through the normal state. , So-called consecutive villa state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type to the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the winning balls are few. It is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination value to the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 15-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 135SG. In the feature unit 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. In this feature unit 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a common reach effect is obtained by a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is executed once. Is to be executed. Further, as the super reach variation pattern, there are a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is executed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is executed three times, and a common super reach reach. The production is to be executed. That is, the feature unit 135SG exemplifies a form in which only one type of reach effect is provided for each of the normal reach effect and the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a reach effect of normal reach or a reach effect of super reach, a plurality of reach effects may be provided.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 135SG corresponds to a special hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 15-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 135SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, the normal reach variation pattern in the feature unit 135SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variably displays the decorative symbol during the variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect that is executed once during the variable display. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the feature unit 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. ..

In addition, in this feature unit 135SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 135SG, the higher the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present feature unit 135SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 135SG. In the feature unit 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times jackpot), PB1-4 (super) Reach pseudo-continuous production 3 times big hit fluctuation pattern). If the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) or PB1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. -2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 2-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 3-time jackpot fluctuation pattern) ..

As shown in FIG. 15-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%. PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present feature unit 135SG, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, the variable display result is determined to have a super reach fluctuation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probabilistic jackpot. Furthermore, paying attention to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. There is. Therefore, in the feature unit 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. do.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time loss variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the variation pattern determination table B, the variation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the variation pattern determination table B, the variation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production once). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the variation pattern determination table C for use, the variation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach time reduction), PA2-1 (normal reach loss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time loss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times) It is determined from the variation pattern of the deviation) and PA2-4 (the variation pattern of the three times of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 135SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 135SG is a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. 15-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 15-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 135SG151B, a normal figure holding storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 135SG153, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), it is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 135SG 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 135SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 15-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Has been done. The effect control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 15-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 135SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 135SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 135SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. Corresponding area) is provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. The area corresponding to "" is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 135SG194A include an area for storing these start opening prize designation commands and a symbol designation command. The area to store, the area to store the variable category specification command, the area to store the hold storage number notification command, the area to store the hold display flag, and whether or not it is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, which will be described later. An area (entry) for storing the area for storing the flash effect target flag at the time of winning and the storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured in association with the number of reserved storages. ing.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) are stored when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The contents (data) of the hold storage for which the start condition is satisfied are copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B of FIG. 15-11 (C), and the copied contents of the hold storage itself are from the start winning command buffer 135SG194A. Will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage area lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to the storage area higher one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the hold storage (buffer number “1-1” or “2-1”) is started, the contents of the hold storage (the content of the hold storage for which the start condition is satisfied) ( Since the data) is copied, a storage area similar to that of the start winning command buffer 135SG194A is provided as shown in FIG. 15-11 (C). That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the hold storage count notification command, and an area for storing the hold display flag. , A region for storing a winning flash effect target flag indicating whether or not it is a target of the winning flash effect, which will be described later, is provided.

In the feature unit 135SG, if a start winning is generated when the variable display is not executed and the hold memory does not exist, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold are based on the start win. The storage number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the start winning command receive command buffer 135SG194A. The hold display flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161) described later.

Then, the stored contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the variable display is terminated.

The hold display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a hold display or a variable display during execution. Although the details will be described later, in the feature unit 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state by the display mode (value of the hold display flag) of the hold display and the active display.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" (step 135SGS102; N). Step 135 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" (step 135SGS105; N). Step 135 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 135SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 135SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step 135SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process of step 135SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 15-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 15-12 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 135SG, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" by the special symbol normal process (step S110 in FIG. 12). It is determined whether or not to control the jackpot game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 12), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process of step 135SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 15-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 15-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 15-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 135SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each determination as a random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the big hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 15-6. 2 is selected and set (step 135SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 15-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 135SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 135SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 135SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 135SGS129). When the time reduction flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Select and set the table D (step 135SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, in this feature unit 135SG, in addition to these deviation pattern determination tables A and deviation pattern determination tables D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance. However, as shown in FIGS. 15-9, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 135SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the reserved storage number changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 15-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 135SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that constitutes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 135SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 135SGS134). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and the step is performed. Proceed to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 135SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. Using the data, the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random number value MR3 is determined (step 135SGS138). In this feature unit 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

FIG. 15-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 15-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 135SGS222).

If the reception command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 135SGS224 (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

When the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command in step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; Y), or when the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command in step 135SGS224 (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226. When the receive command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), when the receive command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command in step 135SGS228. In the case (135SGS228; Y), when the receive command is the second hold storage number notification command in step 135SGS230 (step 135SGS230; Y), the receive command is sent to the start winning command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. 15-11. It is stored at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, when the hold storage does not exist and the variable display is not being executed, the receive command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and when the hold storage exists or the variable display is being executed. , The receive command may be stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 135SG194A.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command). , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning command receive command buffer 135SG194A. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 135SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 135SGS230 (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In the command analysis process of the feature unit 135SG, if the received command is any of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command, the received command is used at the start winning. The form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the free area of the receive command buffer 135SG194A has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the receive command is the first start opening prize designation command, the hold storage number notification command is used. If a timer for waiting for reception is set and the hold storage number notification command is not received before the timer goes out, the entry hold storage that has not received the hold storage number notification command will be described later. It may be set out of the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 135SG will be described. As shown in FIGS. 15-15, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first hold storage display area 135SG005D, and the second hold. The specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) for executing the specific display start effect as the display start animation of the hold display in the storage display area 135SG005U and the display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A is executed. Further, after the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 performs the winning flash effect execution process (step 135SGS163) for executing the winning flash effect, and the hold display after the above-mentioned specific display start effect is completed. And the specific display as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the active display. Specific display for executing the rotation display effect (see FIGS. 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (B-4)). When the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined as the pre-reading notice in the rotation display effect execution process (step 135SGS164) and the feature unit 135SG, the variable display based on the hold memory that is the target of the hold display notice effect ends. Until then, the start port lamp light emission effect execution process (step 135SG165) for executing the start port lamp light emission effect for causing the start port lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display / active display based on the hold storage is executed. Then, any of the processes of steps S170 to S177 is executed.

The specific display rotation display effect execution process in the feature unit 135SG is a process of shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and the hold display is active as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 15-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of FIG. 15-15 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the read-ahead notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240), and determines whether or not there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry for which the display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), the display is already displayed. It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the aspect flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the hold display notice effect as the look-ahead notice effect is already being executed (step 135SGS242). ..

When there is no entry in which the display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step). 135SGS243). When the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category command of the entry indicates the variation category. (Step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold display advance notice effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-17, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is non-reach, the hold display notice effect is not executed (hold display or active display) at a rate of 95%. The display mode of is determined to be white display pattern α), and the hold display notice effect is determined to be executed by the display pattern β (display mode of hold display or active display is blue) at a rate of 5%, and 0%. It is decided to execute the hold display notice effect with the display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or the active display is red) at the ratio of.

If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is other (normal reach), the display pattern α in which the hold display notice effect is not executed (the display mode of the hold display or the active display is white) at a rate of 80%. ), And the hold display notice effect is executed with the display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and the hold display notice effect is displayed at a rate of 0%. Decide to execute with γ (display mode of hold display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order and the variable category is super reach, the hold display notice effect is not executed (the display mode of the hold display or the active display is white display pattern α) at a rate of 65%. It is decided to execute the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 25%, and the hold display notice effect is displayed in the display pattern γ (at a rate of 10%). Decide to execute the display mode of the hold display or the active display in red).

If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the hold display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the hold display or the active display is white) is determined at a rate of 15%, and the rate is 30%. It is decided to execute the hold display notice effect with the display pattern β (the display mode of the hold display or the active display is blue), and the hold display notice effect is displayed with the display pattern γ (the display mode of the hold display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. Is decided to run in red).

That is, in the feature unit 135SG, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in red, the ratio of the target variable display result to the big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and the hold display or the active display is displayed in white. It is set so that the rate at which the target variable display result is out of order is the highest (red> blue> white).

Returning to FIG. 15-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). When the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246; Y), a value (“1” or “2”) corresponding to the determined display pattern is set in the display mode flag of the entry (step 135SGS246; Y). Step 135SGS247), the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated.

When there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), when the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243; Y). When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the display notice effect to be dug in the display mode flag of the entry is set (step 135SGS248). The read-ahead notice setting process ends.

It should be noted that the feature unit 135SG exemplifies a form in which the pre-reading notice effect for determining the display mode of the hold display and the effect for determining the display mode of the active display can be collectively executed as the hold display notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the pre-reading notice effect for determining the display mode of the hold display and the effect for determining the display mode of the active display can be individually executed as different effects. good.

FIG. 15-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 15-15 as the specific display start effect execution process. In the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on whether the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later, is in operation. It may be judged by.

When the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), whether or not the start prize designation command is received (whether or not the start prize designation command reception flag is set). Is determined (step 135SGS252). When the start prize designation command is not received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display start effect execution process is terminated. Further, when the start prize designation command is received (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending storage entry is specified by referring to the start prize reception command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS252; Y). 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not the first special figure is reserved (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not the memory is reserved for the first special figure may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure hold storage (step 135SGS253a; N), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure hold storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), the specification proceeds. It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is the target of the hold display advance notice effect (step 135SGS254). When the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, when the entry is not the target of the hold display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135SGS 255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for the specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (hold display or active display). Then, the process timer for the specific display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, when the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, when the entry is the target of the hold display notice effect (step 135SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (hold display or active display) is set. Select the corresponding process table for the specific display start effect B (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for the specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 of the set specific display start effect process table (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start effect execution process. ..

Further, when the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is the process timer for the specific display start effect (process for the specific display start effect A) being executed. The value of the timer or the process timer for the specific display start effect B) is set to -1 (step 135SGS260), and the process timer for the specific display start effect (the process timer for the running specific display start effect) with the value set to -1 is timer-out. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step 135SGS261). When the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed does not time out (step 135SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents according to the process data of the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (step 135SGS261; N). 135SGS262), the specific display start effect execution process is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed has timed out (step 135SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for the specific display start effect is the last process timer for the specific display start effect. (Step 135SGS263). When the last process timer for the specific display start effect has timed out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is terminated (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated. When the last process timer for the specific display start effect has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the specific display start effect is started, and the next specific display start effect is started. The effect device is controlled (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266) according to the contents according to the process data of the process timer, and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated.

As described above, in the feature unit 135SG, when a start winning is generated and it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect (hold display notice effect) based on the start prize, or the start prize is the second. In the case of a start winning prize to the start port, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 (A) and 15-19 (B), FIGS. 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (B-4). , The appearance animation in which the hold display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as the specific display start effect A at the position corresponding to the hold storage number of the active display area 135SG005A or the hold storage display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U. ..

In the feature unit 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the hold display (active display) as the specific display start effect A is about 0.2 seconds. The hold display (active display) after the end of the specific display start effect A is the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect in the active display area 135SG005A or the hold storage display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U as in the other hold display and active display. Move to display with rotation animation.

In addition, when a start prize is generated, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect (hold display notice effect) is determined based on the start prize, and the start prize is the start prize to the first start port. As shown in FIGS. 15-20 (A) to 15-20 (C) and 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4), first, as the specific display start effect B, an image is displayed. An animation in which the character A appears from the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is displayed on the display device 5. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the variable display is executed at the timing of the starting winning, or if the first special figure hold memory already exists, the character A is the first. 1 An animation that moves to the hold storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping with a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4), the character A is based on the start winning prize. An animation that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold display is displayed is displayed. When the display of the animation is completed, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the lower part to the upper part at the position where the character A attacks.

In the feature unit 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the hold display of the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display start effect B is about. It is 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the appearance animation of the hold display is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display start effect B is executed for the hold display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of the start prize to the completion of the display of the hold display based on the start prize. .. Then, the hold display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the display by the rotation animation in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D as in the other hold display and the active display as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect.

When the character A appears from the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning as the specific display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure hold memory does not exist. , An animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display is displayed based on the start winning prize, as in FIGS. 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4). An animation that attacks (acts) on the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. When the display of the animation is completed, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the lower part to the upper part at the position where the character A attacks.

In the feature unit 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, and the end of the animation. The period from to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of the start prize to the completion of the display of the active display based on the start prize. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the display by the rotation animation in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect.

15-21 and 15-22 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 15-21 as the flash effect execution process at the time of winning. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays them in the starting winning command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the aspect flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the hold display advance notice effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

When there is an entry in which the display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is an entry based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

When the entry is an entry based on a start winning to the first start port (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal state (step 135SGS275). When the gaming state is the normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any of 0 to 3, that is, the gaming state is the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. (Step 135SGS276). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (entry in which the display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is reach (step 135SGS277).

When the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether or not the variable display is being executed (step). 135SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). Whether or not the reach effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the variable display process data and the like.

When the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or when the reach effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the flash effect at the time of winning based on the variable display result. -Determine non-execution. The variable display result may be specified from the symbol specification command of the entry in which the flash effect target flag at the time of winning is not set.

As shown in FIGS. 15-24, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and the non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 90%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and the non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

That is, in the feature unit 135SG, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed from the time of starting winning, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is set higher than the case where the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 15-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined (step 135SG279b). When it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is the target of the flash effect target flag at the time of winning of the relevant entry (entry in which the flash effect target flag at the time of winning is not set). "1" indicating that the memory is on hold is set (step 135SG280), and the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for flash effect at the time of winning the first term is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the first term is started, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (step 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 15-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term is the flash effect at the time of winning the first term by using the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the game effect lamp 9 for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning. Blinks in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 15-26 (A) and 15-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at a high brightness C1. And turn off are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this feature unit 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the first prize and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the second prize, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the first prize. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the time flash effect. Of these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the second prize, a sound having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the first prize such as a dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) may be repeatedly output. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 135SG, in addition to the above-mentioned sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as the sound corresponding to the advance notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display described later are different by using different channels. Simultaneous output is possible from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume.

When the entry is an entry based on winning a prize to the second starting port (step 135SG274; N), when the gaming state is not a normal state (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0 to 3. If not (step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the reach effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed. When (step 135SG279b) is determined, "0" indicating that the entry is not the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is set in the flash effect target flag at the time of winning (step 135SG279c), and the flash effect execution process at the time of winning is executed. finish.

Further, when the winning flash effect executing flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is operating (step). 135SGS284). When the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the first term is operating (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the first term is set to -1 (step 135SGS285), and the value is set to -1 for the previous term. It is determined whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the first term does not time out (step 135SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect device according to the contents according to the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the previous term during execution. Control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Further, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the previous term has timered out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the previous term has timered out (step 135SGS288). When the process timer for flash effect at the time of the last previous term winning is not timered out (step 135SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of process data and starts the process timer for flash effect at the time of the next previous term winning. , The effect device is controlled according to the contents according to the process data of the next process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 includes a game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Further, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the flash effect execution process at the time of winning is terminated. As a mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning may be repeatedly emitted in white or red. In addition, as the mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y and the flash at the time of winning are used. The lamp 135SG009F and the lamp 135SG009F may be made to emit light in the same color.

Further, in step 135SGS288, when the last process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is timered out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 15-23, the late winning flash effect is the late winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the end of the early winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach. The silhouette image of the character A imitated by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 by blinking in a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, and outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1. It is an effect to display 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the second prize, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning may be repeatedly emitted in white or red as in the flash effect at the time of the first prize. Since the flash effect at the time of the second prize is performed with a lower brightness than the flash effect at the time of the first prize (see FIGS. 15-28), the actual light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of the prize in the flash effect at the time of the second prize is It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the first half.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during the period except during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. It is designed to repeat turning on and off (blinking) at. In particular, the blinking cycle at the luminance C2 is longer than the blinking cycle at the time of executing the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and during the blinking, it is shown in FIGS. 15-27 (B) to 15-27 (D). As described above, the frame lamp 9b blinks at a plurality of locations while gradually changing the emission color in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term has a lower impression on the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term.

Further, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning in the first half is not operating in step 135SGS284, that is, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is operating (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 is in the second half. The value of the winning flash effect process timer is set to -1 (step 135SGS298), and it is determined whether or not the late winning flash effect process timer has been timered out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is not timer-out (step 135SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents according to the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning during execution (step 135SGS300). ), Proceed to step 135SGS307.

Then, when the late winning flash effect process timer has timered out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the final late winning flash effect process timer has timered out (step 135SGS301). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the final late winning is not timered out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next late winning is started, and the process data 1 is executed. The effect device is controlled according to the content (step 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

When the process timer for flash effect at the time of the last late winning is timered out (step 135SGS301; Y), the process timer for flash effect at the time of the first late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (step 135SGS301; Y). Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306), and steps 135SGS307.

In step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash effect. Further, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and whether or not "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B, that is, the variable display during execution. Is a variable display of the target of the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution process is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the reach effect (step 135SGS311).

When it is the start timing of the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning, turns off the flag during the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and at the time of winning. The flash effect execution process is terminated.

Further, when it is not the start timing of the reach effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). When the symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a; Y), the late winning flash effect is terminated, the winning flash effect executing flag is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the winning flash effect execution process is performed. finish. When the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is terminated without executing the processes of step 135SGS312 and step 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of winning the first half in the feature unit 135SG is an effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of winning the second half is an effect. It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period elapses until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the target.

Further, if it cannot be determined that the effect control CPU 120 is the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the reach effect. It is possible to end the late winning flash effect including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the end timing of the variable display (reception timing of the symbol confirmation command), which is a later timing.

As shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 15-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 15-22, in the feature unit 135SG, the effect control CPU 120 is a process table for effect 1 as a process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the previous term. Select 1 and select 1 production process table as the flash production process table at the time of late winning. In other words, as the production pattern (production period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first half and the flash production at the time of the second prize of this feature unit 135SG, the same production mode and the same production period are always used at the time of winning the first half regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half are executed.

FIG. 15-25 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer to -1 (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer is out of timer (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table set in the variable display start setting process in the process timer (step 135SGS358). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out (step 135SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the effect device (effect component) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control content of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step). 135SGS361). The variable display compatible sound in the feature unit 135SG refers to a BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, a BGM corresponding to the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), the blinking control is performed in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363), while the flash at the time of winning the previous term is performed. During the execution of the effect (step 135SGS362; Y), the blinking control in the mode corresponding to the variable display during the execution of the game effect lamp 9 is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, the game effect is not executed. The lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the previous term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the advance notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the advance notice effect execution process, for example, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the execution of the variable display at the time when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, and which effect pattern is used to execute the advance notice effect. It suffices if it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the determination result. Further, when determining the effect pattern of the advance notice effect in the above-mentioned variable display start setting process, the advance notice effect is eventually determined by determining one effect pattern from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the variable display result. The ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be different depending on whether or not it is executed in the effect pattern of.

The effect executed as the advance notice effect in the feature unit 135SG is a line advance notice effect in which the character's dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 and the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the displayed dialogue.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, the predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Further, when the variable display control timer is not timer-out (step 135SGS365; N) or after the execution of step 135SGS366, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timer-out (step 135SGS368). .. If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for per special figure. The value is updated according to (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer is not out, the control shifts to stop the variable display when the symbol confirmation command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the process of step 135SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the decorative symbol based on the process table is performed. finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device at the time of executing the flash effect at the time of winning in the feature unit 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-28 to 15-68. First, FIGS. 15-28 is a timing chart when a start winning is generated during execution of the variable display and the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the starting winning. In addition, FIG. 15-28 shows both the case where the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided when the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the start winning, and the case where the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. It is a corresponding timing chart. 15-29 to 15-48 show an image display device 5 in which a start winning is generated during execution of the variable display, and the execution of the hold display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start prize. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of a prize. In FIGS. 15-49 to 15-68, a start prize is generated during the execution of the variable display, and the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start prize, while the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the image display apparatus 5 and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of a prize in the case where it is done.

In addition, in the case of "when the execution of the hold display notice effect and the winning flash effect is decided" shown in FIGS. 15-29 to 15-48, the display mode of the hold display which is the target of the winning flash effect is the display pattern β or. It is a case where it is displayed by the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red circle), and is shown in FIGS. 15-49 to 15-68. "When the non-execution of the effect is determined" refers to the case where the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is displayed by the display pattern α (displayed as a white circle).

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at the volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27). (Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during the execution of the variable display, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the advance notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the advance notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the effect pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to a preview effect such as a sound in which a character or the like speaks a character displayed on the image display device 5) is output at the volume V2. Further, as the reserved storage, there are three first special figure reserved storages (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D).

When a prize (starting prize) to the first starting port occurs during such variable display, and it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 15-28 and FIG. 15-29 (B), the flash effect at the time of winning the first half is started.

As the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, first, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29 (B), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the volume V1 (V1> V2) from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-30 (C) and 15-30 (D), the effect image 135SG005E is started to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, the blinking control of the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the time of winning is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at the luminance C1 which is higher than the luminance C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the first term is started, as shown in FIGS. 15-30 (D), 15-31 (E), and 15-31 (F), the above-mentioned specific display start effect B is used. An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F whose blinking is controlled is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. Then, after the character A moves to the first hold storage display area 135SG005D, the position where the hold display in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is displayed (in the case of the feature unit 135SG, the fourth hold). An animation that attacks (acts) against (the position where the display is displayed) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first hold storage display area 135SG005D, the hold display, which is the target of the running flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term), gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the affected position. The appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). The hold display for which the appearance animation in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotation display as the other hold display as the specific display rotation display effect.

That is, in the present feature unit 135SG, when a start winning is generated during the variable display and the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the starting winning, the display of the hold display based on the starting winning is completed. The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 are started. The appearance animation of the hold display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the feature unit 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning (FIGS. 15-32 (G) and 15-. 32 (H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first half is completed, the flash effect at the time of the second prize is started from the end timing. As shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-32 (G) and 15-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2> cycle T1). Further, the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started to be displayed at regular intervals.

At the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half and the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y as the flash effect at the time of winning the first half, The light emitting mode (blinking in the brightness C1 and the cycle T1) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the first term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is shown in the background image displayed on the image display device 5. It switches to the corresponding mode (blinking in brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (D)). That is, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the light emission mode before the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. The stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The blinking of the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 is the previous period as described above. As the same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 15-29 (A)), the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). Gradation with bluish colors, if the background image is an evening image, gradation with reddish colors, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, is a cycle longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1 but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (length of lamp blinking cycle: T0> T2). > T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not turned on during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (H), 15-33 (I), and 15-33 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B having transparency over the entire area of the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the feature unit 135SG is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when it is overlapped with the black image 135SG005B.

The feature unit 135SG exemplifies a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when it is overlapped with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red described above, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which color the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 15-32 (H) and 15-33 (J), in the feature unit 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device is displayed. A small symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the feature unit 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small symbol 135SG005M are not displayed in duplicate, and the player displays the silhouette image 135SG005S during the execution of the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not it is inside, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small symbol 135SG005M.

As shown in FIGS. 15-33 (J), 15-34 (K), and 15-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol are displayed on the image display device 5. The small symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a detachment (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is deleted from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of the late winning in the feature unit 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the symbol determination period. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 (J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the symbol determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the flash effect compatible sound is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the hold display first displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display and is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The display position of the remaining hold display is shifted to the right by one. Further, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Hereinafter, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 (K) to 15-41 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L as the flash effect at the time of the late winning. The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, the brightness C2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking of the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (S) to 15-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period (FIG. 15-40 (W). ). In this feature unit 135SG, the decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the special symbol that notifies the temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside. In the latter half of the prize-winning flash effect, the output of the sound corresponding to the prize-winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness C2 of the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the period T2, and the image display device 5. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (Y) and 15-41 (Z), when the variable display that is out of the normal reach is completed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative pattern and the small size are displayed on the image display device 5. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a detachment (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is deleted from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of the late winning in the feature unit 135SG is also executed during the symbol fixing period of the variable display that is out of the normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (Y) and 15-41 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is duplicately displayed on the image display device 5 even during the symbol determination period. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 15-40 (W) and 15-40 (X), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol. It emits light in a light emitting mode according to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, in the case of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol for the first time in the variable display, it is blue at the luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the revariable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to. Further, since the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the player can visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not been completed yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-42 (a) and 15-42 (b), when the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is started, it is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The hold display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-43 (c) to 15-47 (l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of the late winning is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-43 (d) and 15-44 (e)). Further, since the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at least twice during the variable display (FIGS. 15-45 (g) to 15-46 (j)). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speakers 8L and 8R are used as the flash effect at the time of the late prize during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-46 (j)). The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, the blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-45 (g) and 15-46 (j), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are the decorative symbols during the period of temporary stop of the decorative symbol. (For example, if it is the first temporary stop, it emits light at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it emits light at brightness C2), and the revariable display is executed. Based on this, the light emission mode corresponding to the background image is returned. Although not shown in the feature unit 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker are used during the temporary stop period of the third decorative pattern. The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern for the third time, and emit light according to the background image based on the execution of the revariable display. Return to the embodiment.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-48 (m) and 15-48 (n), when the start timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is reached. After the 135SG005F is temporarily whitened out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the reach effect is started. In the feature unit 135SG, the whiteout of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that the reach effect of the super reach is executed thereafter.

At the whiteout timing, the speaker 8L as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the 8R, the brightness C2 of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking of the period T2, in the image display device 5. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Further, at the whiteout timing, the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y ends in the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. .. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the whiteout period, the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept off at the time of winning. Then, from the timing when the whiteout is completed, as an embodiment corresponding to the reach effect described above, according to the reach effect of the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d at the time of winning. The light emitting mode (lighting at the brightness C1) is started.

Further, during the whiteout period, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. That is, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound. From the timing when the whiteout ends, the above-mentioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, Along with the start of light emission mode (lighting at brightness C1) according to the reach effect of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d, the output of the reach effect compatible sound, which is the sound corresponding to the reach effect, is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. .. As the reach effect compatible sound in this feature unit 135SG, a BGM or the like different from the variable display compatible sound should be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach reach effect) is being executed. Just do it.

As shown in FIGS. 15-28, when a start prize is generated during the execution of the variable display and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided based on the start prize, the start port lamp light emission effect is set. From the timing of the start winning, the start port lamp 135SG009S has a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display notice effect (for example, blue when the display pattern of the hold display is the display pattern β, and the display pattern of the hold display is the display pattern γ. In the case of red), it starts emitting light.

The light emission of the start port lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the above-mentioned flash effect at the time of winning, and regardless of the blinking mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned start From the time of winning until the end of the variable display of the target of the start port lamp emission effect (variable display of the target of the flash effect at the time of winning), the light emission in the color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is continued.

Next, in the start winning while the variable display is being executed, the case where the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is not determined together with the flash effect at the time of winning will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at the volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27). (Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during the execution of the variable display, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the advance notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the advance notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the effect pattern (sound corresponding to the advance notice effect) is output at the volume V2. Further, as the reserved storage, there are three first special figure reserved storages (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D).

When a prize (starting prize) to the first starting port occurs during such variable display, and it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 15-28 and FIG. 15-49 (B), the flash effect at the time of winning the first half is started.

As the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, first, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49 (B), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the volume V1 (V1> V2) from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-50 (C) and 15-50 (D), the effect image 135SG005E is started to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, the blinking control of the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the time of winning is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at the luminance C1 which is higher than the luminance C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the first term is started, as shown in FIGS. 15-49 (B), 15-50 (C), and 15-50 (D), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect A, An appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display, which is the target of the running flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term), gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Figs. 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (Fig. 15-19 (B-1)). See B-4)). The hold display for which the appearance animation in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotation display as the other hold display as the specific display rotation display effect.

In particular, when the specific display start effect A is executed together with the flash effect at the time of winning, the appearance animation of the hold display ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned specific display start effect B is executed together with the flash effect at the time of winning, the appearance animation of the hold display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E is completed on the image display device 5 (FIGS. 15-29 to FIG. (See 15-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the hold display (appearance animation) is completed at a timing earlier than the case where the specific display start effect B is executed, and the animation shifts to the rotation animation.

That is, in the present feature unit 135SG, when a start winning is generated during the variable display and the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the starting winning, the display of the hold display based on the starting winning is completed. The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 are started. The appearance animation of the hold display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in the feature unit 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first half is completed, the flash effect at the time of the second prize is started from the end timing. As shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-52 (G) and 15-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2> cycle T1). Further, the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started to be displayed at regular intervals.

At the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half and the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y as the flash effect at the time of winning the first half, The light emitting mode (blinking in the brightness C1 and the cycle T1) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the first term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is shown in the background image displayed on the image display device 5. It switches to the corresponding mode (blinking in brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (D)). That is, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the light emission mode before the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. The stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The blinking of the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 is the previous period as described above. As the same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 15-29 (A)), the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). Gradation with bluish colors, if the background image is an evening image, gradation with reddish colors, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, is a cycle longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1 but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (length of lamp blinking cycle: T0> T2). > T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not turned on during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-52 (H), 15-53 (I), and 15-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B having transparency over the entire area of the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 15-52 (H) and 15-53 (J), in the feature unit 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device is displayed. A small symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the feature unit 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small symbol 135SG005M are not displayed in duplicate, and the player displays the silhouette image 135SG005S during the execution of the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not it is inside, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small symbol 135SG005M.

As shown in FIGS. 15-53 (J), 15-54 (K), and 15-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small size are displayed on the image display device 5. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a detachment (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is deleted from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of the late winning in the feature unit 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is the symbol determination period. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-53 (J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the symbol determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the flash effect compatible sound is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the hold display first displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display and is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The display position of the remaining hold display is shifted to the right by one. Further, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Hereinafter, as shown in FIGS. 15-54 (K) to 15-61 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L as the flash effect at the time of the late winning. The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-58 (S) to 15-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period during which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 15-60 (W). ). In this feature unit 135SG, the decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the special symbol that notifies the temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside. In), as the flash effect at the time of the late prize, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness C2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking at the period T2, the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S in is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-61 (Y) and 15-51 (Z), when the variable display that is out of the normal reach is completed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative pattern and the small size are displayed on the image display device 5. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a detachment (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is deleted from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of the late winning in the feature unit 135SG is also executed during the symbol fixing period of the variable display that is out of the normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-61 (Y) and 15-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is duplicately displayed on the image display device 5 even during the symbol determination period. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 15-60 (W) and 15-60 (X), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d during the period of temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It emits light in a light emitting mode according to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, in the case of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol for the first time in the variable display, it is blue at the luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the revariable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to. Further, since the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the player can visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not been completed yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-62 (a) and 15-62 (b), when the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is started, it is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The hold display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-63 (c) to 15-67 (l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of the late winning is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-63 (d) and 15-64 (e)). Further, since the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at least twice during the variable display (FIGS. 15-65 (g) to 15-66 (j)). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 15-65 (g) and 15-66 (j), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are the decorative symbols during the period of temporary stop of the decorative symbol. (For example, if it is the first temporary stop, it emits light at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it emits light at brightness C2), and the revariable display is executed. Based on this, the light emission mode corresponding to the background image is returned. Although not shown in the feature unit 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker are used during the temporary stop period of the third decorative pattern. The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern for the third time, and emit light according to the background image based on the execution of the revariable display. Return to the embodiment.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speakers 8L and 8R are used as the flash effect at the time of the late prize during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-66 (j)). The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, the blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-68 (m) and 15-68 (n), when the start timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is reached. After the 135SG005F is temporarily whitened out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the reach effect is started. It should be noted that the feature unit 135SG suggests that the first display area 135SG005F is whitened out, so that the reach effect of the super reach is executed thereafter.

At the whiteout timing, the speaker 8L as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the 8R, the brightness C2 of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking of the period T2, in the image display device 5. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Further, at the whiteout timing, the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y ends in the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. .. These main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, and movable body lamps 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but emit light in a manner corresponding to the reach effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. ..

Further, during the whiteout period, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. That is, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound. From the timing when the whiteout ends, the above-mentioned winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, Along with the start of light emission mode (lighting at brightness C1) according to the reach effect of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d, the output of the reach effect compatible sound, which is the sound corresponding to the reach effect, is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. .. As the reach effect compatible sound in this feature unit 135SG, a BGM or the like different from the variable display compatible sound should be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach reach effect) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 135SG, FIGS. 15-28, 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (FIG. 15-49). As shown in D), the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning emits light before the display of the holding display is completed, so that the player can easily recognize the holding display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. .. Further, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks in the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the brightness C2 and the cycle during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. While blinking at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and at the time of the second prize. Since it blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 during the flash effect execution period, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term. Since the movable lamp 9d can also make the flash effect at the time of winning more conspicuous by blinking at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1, it is easier for the game to recognize the hold display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. It has become.

In the feature unit 135SG, when a new start prize is generated during the variable display, whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed for the hold memory based on the start prize. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new start prize is generated when the variable display is not executed and the hold memory does not exist, the start prize is given. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the hold display notice effect for the hold memory based on. Specifically, when a new start prize is generated during the variable display, the display pattern α to the display pattern γ (hold display notice effect) are displayed in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution or the display pattern in the case of executing the hold display notice effect), the rotation display of the active display is performed as the specific display rotation display effect. At the same time, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of the first prize and the flash effect at the time of the second prize) may be executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start prize.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-15, 15-30 (D) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (B) to 15-50 (D), the specific display start effect is suspended. The part where the appearance animation that gradually appears from the bottom to the top of the display is displayed, and FIGS. 15-15, 15-30 (D) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (B) to 15-. As shown in 50 (D), it is composed of being displayed as a hold display or a rotation animation, and as shown in FIGS. 15-19 and 15-20, from the timing when the appearance animation of the hold display is completed. Since the rotation animation of the hold display is started, the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), when the specific display start effect B is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is performed from the timing before the display start of the hold display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning can be further emphasized. In addition, in this feature unit 135SG, even when the specific display start effect A of FIGS. 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D) is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is performed from the timing before the display start of the hold display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning can be further emphasized.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, the execution period of the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds, and FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49 (A) to 15 As shown in -50 (D), since the flash effect at the time of winning is started before the end timing of the specific display start effect A, the display pattern of the hold display is any of the display patterns α to the display pattern γ. However, since the flash effect at the time of winning can be started before the specific display start effect ends, the player can surely recognize the hold display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-29 (A), 15-29 (B), 15-49 (A), and 15-49 (B), at the time of winning based on the starting prize. If it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player can start the flash effect at the time of winning by turning off the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d at the time of winning. Can be recognized.

In this feature unit 135SG, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting prize, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, the main lamp 9a, and the frame The lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are to emit light at a brightness lower than the immediately preceding brightness (for example, if the lamp has been emitting light at the brightness C2 until then, the brightness is C3 lower than the brightness C2). It may be changed. That is, the "low brightness state" in the present invention means a state in which the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are emitting light at low brightness at the time of winning, and also extinguishing. The state of being (not emitting light) is also included.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-48 (n) and 15-49 (A) to 15-68 (n), the advance notice effect is being executed during the variable display. The flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on the case and the case where the flash is not being executed. As shown in FIG. 15-29 (B), the speakers 8L and 8R execute the flash effect at the time of winning while the variable display is being executed. When the variable display compatible sound is output at the volume V2, the winning flash effect compatible sound is output at the volume V1 (V1> V2), and when the winning flash effect is executed during the advance notice effect, the winning flash effect is executed. The sound corresponding to the advance notice effect is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1> V2). Therefore, even if the variable display compatible sound and the advance notice effect compatible sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash effect compatible sound can be output so that the player can easily hear the winning flash effect. The output of the corresponding sound makes it easier for the player to recognize the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this feature unit 135SG, as a form in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the advance notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the advance notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display body, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the advance notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are lower in volume than the volume V2. It may be output at (for example, volume V3).

Further, the feature unit 135SG exemplifies a mode in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the advance notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in preference to the sound corresponding to the advance notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, if the advance notice effect is started during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L, 8R), the prize is won from the speakers 8L, 8R. The output of the hour flash effect compatible sound may be temporarily stopped and only the variable display compatible sound and the advance notice effect compatible sound, or only one of the advance notice effect compatible sound and the variable display compatible sound may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the sound corresponding to the advance notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display become difficult for the player to hear due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), at the time of winning according to the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the flash effect lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts blinking after the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the hold display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to promptly make the player aware that the start winning is generated and the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided, so that the game entertainment is improved. can.

In this feature unit 135SG, an example is described in which the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts blinking after the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the hold display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the appearance animation of the hold display are started after the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize is blinked at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half, and the flash at the time of winning is flashed during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half. By blinking the lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 (C1> C2), at least by blinking the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1, the player can be made to recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. , It is possible to prevent the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning from blinking at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, which hinders other effects and reduces the entertainment interest.

In this feature unit 135SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the luminance C1 and the cycle T2 as the winning flash effect in the first half, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is used as the second winning flash effect. As a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis", an example is shown in which the lamp blinks in a luminance C2 having a luminance lower than the luminance C1 and a cycle T2 having a period longer than the cycle T1. That is, as the "specific mode in which the degree of emphasis is low" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the feature unit 135SG, the low-speed blinking mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the slow blinking speed (long blinking cycle). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used for a winning flash in a late winning flash effect. As the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F, only one of these low-speed blinking modes and the low-luminance mode may be used.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period during which the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Since the execution period of the variable display is included, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinks at the luminance C2 and the cycle T2 before and after the start of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a variable display of, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first half, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the player can be made to recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning by displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term. During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize, by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, which becomes an obstacle to other displays and is a game of entertainment. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

In particular, in the feature unit 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. 15-30 (D) to 15-31 (F) and 15-34 (L). Since the image is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Then, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at the volume V2 (V1> V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, it becomes possible to easily make the player recognize that the flash effect at the time of winning has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half of the year, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, so that other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, which reduces the entertainment interest. It can be suppressed.

In this feature unit 135SG, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, so that other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although an example of a form for suppressing a decline in the interest of a game is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects are won by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning. It may be possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, before the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. During the variable display symbol confirmation period, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning continues to blink, that is, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the symbol confirmation command (the confirmation command reception flag is set), or is variable. Regardless of whether the display time timer is out or not, the player is controlled to the jackpot game state by continuously blinking the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning even during the symbol confirmation period. The expectation of the game can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this feature unit 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are arranged according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (brightness). After the flash effect at the time of the first prize is completed, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is used as the flash effect at the time of the second prize (brightness C2 and the cycle T2) according to the flash effect at the time of the second prize. ), While the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are made to emit light in an mode (brightness C2 and period T0) according to the background image. Is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the first prize is finished, so that the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed during the execution period. It may be possible to prevent the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d at the time of winning from emitting light in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-3, a small symbol 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 15-33 (J), the symbol is confirmed. During the period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped. Therefore, even if the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning continues to emit light during the symbol confirmation period, the small symbol 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a loss. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the symbol is being determined.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 (J) and the like, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 while the flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, while it is small. Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display due to the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 during the variable display, and the variable display during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning the special symbol (see FIGS. 15-40, etc.) that stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle" when the decorative symbol temporarily stops. Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in duplicate, the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the special symbol, which can give the player unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-42 (a) to 15-47 (l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the interest of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, during the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 before the start of the reach effect to produce the reach effect. At the start timing, while the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned off, as shown in FIGS. 15-22, it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it cannot be done, the flash effect at the time of the second prize including the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is again at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the symbol confirmation command) which is the timing after the start timing of the reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-22, when it cannot be determined that the effect control CPU 120 is the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity or the like, the effect control CPU 120 determines the symbol. Since the late winning flash effect is terminated based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the discomfort when ending the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-21, if a start winning to the first starting port occurs during the execution of the reach effect of the super reach, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined, so that the reach effect of the super reach is produced. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in games due to a decline in attention to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-17, the feature unit 135SG can display the hold display and the active display in any of the display patterns α to the display patterns γ having different jackpot expectations, and is shown in FIGS. 15-28. As shown, when it is decided that the start port lamp 135SG009S displays the hold display or the active display by the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning or the game effect as a flash effect at the time of winning. Regardless of the light emitting mode of the lamp 9 or the like, since the light is emitted in the color corresponding to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning, the player can display the hold or the active display. Can be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the start port lamp 135SG009S, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Although the feature portions of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Will be.

For example, the late winning flash effect in the feature unit 135SG exemplifies a mode in which the flash effect is executed regardless of whether or not the symbol is fixed during the symbol determination period (variable display is stopped), but the present invention is limited thereto. As shown in FIGS. 15-69 to 15-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of late winning, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette. The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The variable display compatible sound is output at the volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27). (Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during the execution of the variable display, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the advance notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the advance notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the effect pattern (sound corresponding to the advance notice effect) is output at the volume V2. Further, as the reserved storage, there are three first special figure reserved storages (three reserved displays are displayed in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D).

When a prize (starting prize) to the first starting port occurs during such variable display, and it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 15-69 and FIG. 15-70 (B), the flash effect at the time of winning the first half is started.

As the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, first, as shown in FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (B), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the volume V1 (V1> V2) from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-71 (C) and 15-71 (D), the effect image 135SG005E is started to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, the blinking control of the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the time of winning is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at the luminance C1 which is higher than the luminance C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the first term is started, as shown in FIGS. 15-71 (D), 15-72 (E), and 15-72 (F), the above-mentioned specific display start effect B is used. An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F whose blinking is controlled is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. Then, after the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, the character A is the fourth position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D (in the case of the present modification 135SG-1). An animation that attacks (acts) against (the position where the hold display is displayed) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first hold storage display area 135SG005D, the hold display, which is the target of the running flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term), gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the affected position. The appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). The hold display for which the appearance animation in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotation display as the other hold display as the specific display rotation display effect.

That is, in the present modification 135SG-1, when a start prize is generated during the variable display and the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the start prize, the display of the hold display based on the start prize is completed. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. The appearance animation of the hold display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the present modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning (FIGS. 15-73 (G) and FIGS. See 15-73 (H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first half is completed, the flash effect at the time of the second prize is started from the end timing. As shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-73 (G) and 15-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness C2 and blinks in a cycle T2 (cycle T2> cycle T1). Blinking (blinking in the mode shown in FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (D)), silhouette image of character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals of 135SG005S. Is started to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamp 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y in the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). Gradation with bluish colors, if the background image is an evening image, gradation with reddish colors, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, is a cycle longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1 but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (length of lamp blinking cycle: T0> T2). > T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not turned on during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-74 (I) and 15-74 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. 1 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B having transparency over the entire area of the display area 135SG005F is overlapped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-74 (J), 15-75 (K), and 15-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small size are displayed on the image display device 5. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a detachment (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is deleted from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-76 (M) and 15-76 (N), the latter period is during the symbol determination period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display. The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable Only blinking in a mode corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the body lamp 9d is continuously executed.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the hold display first displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display and is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The display position of the remaining hold display is shifted to the right by one. Further, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Hereinafter, as shown in FIGS. 15-75 (K) to 15-82 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L as the flash effect at the time of the late winning. While the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, the brightness C2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking of the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed. During the symbol confirmation period, the speaker 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning the prize are output at the volume V2 of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness C2 of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the period T2 are blinking, and the image is displayed. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-79 (S) to 15-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period (FIG. 15-81 (FIG. 15-81). See W). In this modification 135SG-1, the decorative symbols showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the special symbol that notifies the temporary stop to the decorative symbol display area 5C inside. Is temporarily stopped), as the flash effect at the time of late winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L, 8R at the volume V2, the brightness C2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the blinking of the period T2, the image display. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 15-81 (W), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the prize is won when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. The brightness C2 of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking in the cycle T2 are not executed, but depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning even during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol Blinking is now executed. That is, in the present modification 135SG-1, the flash effect at the time of winning is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol for the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-82 (Y) and 15-82 (Z), when the variable display that is out of the normal reach is completed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative pattern and the small size are displayed on the image display device 5. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a detachment (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is deleted from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of the late winning in the feature unit 135SG is also executed during the symbol fixing period of the variable display that is out of the normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-82 (Y) and 15-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is duplicately displayed on the image display device 5 even during the symbol determination period. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 15-81 (W) and 15-81 (X), during the period during which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display has not been completed by visually recognizing the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-83 (a) and 15-83 (b), when the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is started, it is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The hold display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-84 (c) to 15-88 (l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of the late winning is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-84 (d) and 15-85 (e)). Further, since the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at least twice during the variable display (FIGS. 15-86 (g) to 15-87 (j)). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speakers 8L and 8R are used as the flash effect at the time of the late prize during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-87 (j)). The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, the brightness C2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking of the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-89 (m) and 15-89 (n), when the start timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is reached. After the 135SG005F is temporarily whitened out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the reach effect is started. In the present modification 135SG-1, it is suggested that the first display area 135SG005F is whitened out, so that the reach effect of the super reach is executed thereafter.

At the whiteout timing, the speaker 8L as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the 8R, the brightness C2 of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking of the period T2, in the image display device 5. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continuously executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-69, when a start prize is generated during the execution of the variable display and the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined based on the start prize, the start port lamp light emission effect is set. From the timing of the start winning, the start port lamp 135SG009S has a color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display notice effect (for example, blue when the display pattern of the hold display is the display pattern β, and the display pattern of the hold display is the display pattern γ. In the case of red), it starts emitting light.

The light emission of the start port lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the above-mentioned flash effect at the time of winning, and regardless of the blinking mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned start From the time of winning until the end of the variable display of the target of the start port lamp emission effect (variable display of the target of the flash effect at the time of winning), the light emission in the color corresponding to the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is continued.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-1, when the flash effect at the time of winning is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is stopped as the flash effect at the time of the late winning during the symbol confirmation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display is being executed by continuously lighting the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a flash effect at the time of the late winning during the symbol confirmation period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol during the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol of the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. By continuing the blinking of the luminance C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from misidentifying that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

In the modified example 135SG-1, during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is lit, and the silhouette of the flash effect at the time of the late winning. The embodiment in which the display of the image 135SG005S is stopped is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol determination period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, one of these is the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of the late winning of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S. Alternatively, only two may be executed.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of late winning, the light emission of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning. An example is an example in which the display of the image 135SG005S is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the flash at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the latter prize during the symbol determination period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter prize. As a form in which the output of the effect corresponding sound, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. are not executed, for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning. By clearing the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the second prize, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize as the flash effect at the time of the second prize, the light emission of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of the prize, by clearing the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the second prize. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may not be executed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 again selects the late winning flash effect process table and resets and starts the late winning flash effect process timer based on the reception of the first variable display start command. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started according to the start of the new variable display.

Further, as a form in which the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning is not executed during the symbol determination period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the flash at the time of the late winning. Based on the fact that the symbol confirmation command was received during the execution of the effect, the lamp control board 14 is not the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, but the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning. The lighting control data for maintaining the extinguishing (for example, "0: 0: 0" indicating extinguishing as the RGB value of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning) may be continuously output until the variable display start command is received. ..

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the symbol confirmation period, the sound output corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette image will be displayed again from the start timing of the new variable display. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see Fig. 15-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the lighting of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-1, when the variable display ends during the execution of the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R as the late winning flash effect during the variable display symbol determination period. While stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S at the time of winning, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d. Although the blinking in the above mode is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are used during the symbol determination period. Blinking may also stop. In particular, as a form in which the blinking of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d is stopped during the symbol confirmation period, the in lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9c are movable. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the symbol determination period. It may be maintained in a state where it is continuously lit with a color corresponding to the image).

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, as the explanation of FIG. 15-8, it is described that a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effect of the super reach. In this way, a plurality of reach effects are provided as the reach effect of the super reach. When the above is provided, the jackpot expectation is different among the reach effects of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach effect of the super reach, the reach effect of the super reach α and the reach expectation of the super reach α are higher than the reach effect of the super reach α. A high reach effect of super reach β may be provided).

In particular, when it is possible to execute the reach effect of a plurality of super reach having different jackpot expectations as described above, as shown in FIGS. 15-90 (A) and 15-90 (B) as a modified example 135SG-2. , The movable body 32 can be moved between the retracted position (for example, the upper position of the image display device 5) and the effect position (for example, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5), and the flash effect at the time of winning. When the variable display that is the target of the variable display is a variable display with a fluctuation pattern of the super reach α (variable display that executes the reach effect of the super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is displayed. By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the effect position described above) during the period in which the first display area 135SG005F to be excluded is once whitened out, the movable body 32 is moved. A movable body movement suggestion effect that suggests moving to the effect position of is executed, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variable pattern of super reach β (executes the reach effect of super reach β). In the case of variable display), the movable body 32 is further retracted after the above-mentioned movable body operation suggestion effect is executed during the period in which the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whitened out. A movable body motion effect that moves from a position to an effect position may be executed.

By doing so, during the whiteout period, the player can pay attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the effect position (when the movable body motion effect is executed). Can notify the player that the reach effect of the super reach β, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect of the super reach α, is executed by the movable body motion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is as shown in FIGS. 15-91 (A) and 15-91 (B). When the variable display is started, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Further, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of the late winning is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-91 (B), 15-92 (C), and 15-92 (D)). Further, since the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at least twice during the variable display (FIGS. 15-93 (E) to 15-94 (H)). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speakers 8L and 8R are used as the flash effect at the time of the late prize during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-94 (H)). The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, the blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-95 (I) to 15-96 (L), when the start timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is reached. The 135SG005F is temporarily whitened out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). In the present modification 135SG-2, it is suggested that the first display area 135SG005F is whitened out, so that the reach effect of the super reach is executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (A) and 15-96 (K) to 15-97 (N), during the whiteout period, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion effect, the movable body operation suggestion effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (4 reciprocations in the present modification 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). Will end and the whiteout period will also end. During the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect, the output of the movable body motion suggestion effect sound is executed at the volume V2 instead of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, a sound effect (for example, "rattling" or the like) that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggested position. ) Etc. should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (A), 15-98 (O), and 15-98 (P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggestion effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 is super. Along with the start of the reach effect of the reach α, the lighting of the brightness C1 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in a mode corresponding to the reach effect starts. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the output of the reach effect compatible sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display compatible sound) corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach α is started.

Further, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β, the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is as shown in FIGS. 15-99 (A) and 15-99 (B). When the variable display is started, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Further, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of the late winning is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-99 (B), 15-100 (C), and 15-100 (D)). Further, since the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at least twice during the variable display (FIGS. 15-101 (E) to 15-102 (H)). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speakers 8L and 8R are used as the flash effect at the time of the late prize during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-102 (H)). The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, the brightness C2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking of the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-103 (I) to 15-104 (L), when the start timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is reached. The 135SG005F is temporarily whitened out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). In the present modification 135SG-2, it is suggested that the first display area 135SG005F is whitened out, so that the reach effect of the super reach is executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (B) and 15-104 (K) to 15-105 (N), during the whiteout period, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body movement suggestion effect, the movable body operation is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (4 reciprocations in the present modification 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). The production ends. During the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect, the output of the movable body motion suggestion effect sound is executed at the volume V2 instead of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the sound corresponding to the motion suggestion effect of the movable body, a sound effect such as "rattling" that the player can recognize that the movable body 32 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggested position (for example, rattling). ) Etc. should be output.

After the end of the movable body motion suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-90 (B) and 15-106 (O) to 15-106 (P), the whiteout period ends, and the movable body motion effect is produced. The movable body 32 moves from the retracted position to the effect position by a drive mechanism (not shown). During the period of the movable body operation effect, the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d at the time of winning are set to the brightness C1 in the manner corresponding to the movable body operation effect. Light. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 15-90 (B), the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the motion effect of the movable body at the volume V1 (see FIGS. 15-106 (P)). As the sound corresponding to the movement effect of the movable body in the feature unit 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "Zudorn") in which the player can recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-107 (Q), the movable body operation effect ends based on the return of the movable body 32 from the effect position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (B), 15-107 (Q), and 15-107 (R), the image display device 5 has a super reach from the timing when the movable body motion effect and the whiteout are completed. Along with the start of the reach effect of β, the lighting of the brightness C1 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a mode corresponding to the reach effect is started. , The output of the reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach β is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the reach production compatible sound corresponding to the reach production of the super reach β, the variable display compatible sound and the reach of the super reach α so that the player can recognize that the reach production of the super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like different from the reach production compatible sound corresponding to the production may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of the super reach which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is set to the luminance C2 and the period T2 before the start of the reach effect of the super reach. The flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned on at the brightness C2 from the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach. Since the light is emitted (lights up at the brightness C2) in a mode corresponding to the reach effect instead of the blinking of the cycle T2, the game fun of the reach effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-96 (K) to 15-98 (O) and FIGS. 15-104 (K) to 15-106 (O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout). At the same time, during the whiteout period, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned off, and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned on at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach production of the super reach, so that the flash at the time of winning is used. Since it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to a change in the light emitting mode of the lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β, the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed. The flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned off according to the execution of, and then the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is used for the movable body operation effect according to the execution of the movable body operation effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the effect position). It lights up at the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. That is, since the light emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is turned on at the brightness C1 with the extinguishing caused by the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, the change in the light emitting mode gives the player a sense of discomfort. Since it can be prevented, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the feature unit 135SG exemplifies a mode in which a dialogue notice effect can be executed as a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 135SG-3, as the advance notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes stepwise in addition to the dialogue advance notice effect, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change stages. It may be possible to execute a step-up effect having different degrees, a group notice effect in which a plurality of character groups cross the image display device 5, and the like.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 15-108 (A) and 15-109 (A) to 15-113 (L), at the time of winning. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the flash at the time of winning is used at the timing of displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing of changing the image stepwise. The lamp 135SG009F may be temporarily turned on at the brightness C2 to enhance the effect of the step-up effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15-108 (B) and 15-114 (A) to 15-118 (F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. At this time, since the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning has already been blinked at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, the timing at which the image (step-up image) is displayed on the image display device 5 and the image are changed stepwise. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F that is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect is adapted to the step-up effect. The light may not be emitted depending on the embodiment.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, that is, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is already bright C2 as the flash effect at the time of winning. If the step-up effect of lighting the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started while the lamp is blinking in the cycle T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is prioritized and executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a mode corresponding to the step-up effect from an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the winning flash effect.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, an embodiment in which the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the reach effect of the super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the start of the reach effect of the super reach. Is capable of performing a movable body motion effect of moving the movable body 32 from a retracted position (for example, an upper position of the image display device 5) to an effect position (for example, a center front position in a front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, it may be possible to notify the player that the reach effect of the super reach is executed.

As described above, when the movable body motion effect can be executed before the reach effect of the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 15-119 (A) and 15-119 (B) as the modified example 135SG-4, When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode according to the movable body operation effect. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on which of the light emitting modes is changed according to the reach effect of the super reach.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is a big hit, the movable body at a rate of 70% at the start of the variable display. From the operation production start timing, it was decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode according to the movable body motion effect, and the reach effect was started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode according to the reach effect. If the variable display result of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is out of alignment, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts from the movable body operation effect start timing at a rate of 30% at the start of the variable display. It was decided to change the light emitting mode from the mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emitting mode according to the motion effect of the movable body, and from the start timing of the reach effect at a rate of 70%, the light emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning. Is decided to be changed from the mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the reach effect.

If it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode according to the movable body motion effect or the light emitting mode according to the reach effect, the determination is made. The process data corresponding to the above may be selected, and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning may be controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, the case where the movable body motion effect is being executed and the case where the movable body motion effect is being executed according to the timing of ending the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the super Since there are cases where the reach effect of the reach is being executed, the game determines whether the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning is during the execution period of the moving body motion effect or during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach. It can be easily recognized by a person. In particular, as shown in FIG. 15-119 (C), the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body operation effect. Since the jackpot expectation is different between the case of using the light emitting mode and the case of using the light emitting mode according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the player at the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the present modification 135SG-4, the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changes to the light emitting mode according to the movable body movement effect or the light emitting mode according to the reach effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to suggest the set value set in the machine 1. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-4, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning emits light at either the start of the movable body movement effect during the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, or the start of the reach effect of the super reach. The mode can be changed, and the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode according to the movable body operation effect from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. Since the jackpot expectation differs depending on the start timing of the reach effect and the case where the light emission mode is set according to the reach effect, the player pays attention to the effect executed at the timing when the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning changes. It can be made to improve the game entertainment.

In the present modification 135SG-4, in the variable display of the super reach, a mode in which the movable body motion effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of the super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion effect, it may be possible to execute the movable body motion suggestion effect that suggests that the movable body motion effect is executed. In this way, when the movable body motion suggestion effect can be executed before the movable body motion effect is executed, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is suggested from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect. A case is provided in which the light emitting mode is changed from the start timing of the effect to the light emitting mode according to the moving body motion suggestion effect, and the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body operation suggestion effect. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on whether the light emitting mode is set according to the movable body motion suggestion effect from the start timing or the light emitting mode is set according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a prize is won. There is a case where the light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F ends at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and a case where the light emission ends at the start timing of the reach effect. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on whether it ends with. As described above, even when a plurality of timings for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1 are provided, the effect control CPU 120 flashes at the time of winning due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the symbol confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings. All you have to do is end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be ended at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the reach effect, the flash effect at the time of winning is displayed. At the end timing of the variable display of the target, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, as the display pattern of the specific display (hold display and active display), the display pattern α which is a white circle with the lowest expectation of big hit and the blue color where the expectation of big hit is higher than the display pattern α. The display pattern β, which is a round shape of, and the display pattern γ, which is a red circle with a higher expectation of big hit than the display pattern β, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display is not limited to this. As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to the display pattern γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 as a modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to the display pattern γ, either the hold display or the display as the active display is being displayed. Display pattern δ, which is a circle with blinking white, which may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of (Expected change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low), as a hold display or active display There is a higher possibility that the display pattern β or display pattern γ will change at any timing during display (expected change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high). The display pattern ε of may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the hold display and the active display in the modified example 135SG-5, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation of a big hit for the display patterns α to the display pattern γ, and the display pattern α (white display). ) Is set with the lowest expectation of big hits. On the other hand, regarding the display pattern δ and the jackpot expectation of the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than that of the display pattern α, or the jackpot expectation may be set lower than that of the display pattern α. The jackpot expectation may be set higher and the jackpot expectation may be set lower than the display pattern β.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε that may change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ are provided as the hold display and the active display pattern, but the present invention is limited thereto. The display pattern α may be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Further, there may be a case where the display pattern β is changed to the display pattern γ for the hold display and the active display.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, whether or not the hold display notice effect (the effect of displaying the hold display or the active display by the display pattern β or the display pattern β) and the display pattern are determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the form of determination is illustrated regardless of this, the present invention is not limited to this, and is related to the presence / absence of execution of these hold display notice effects, the determination of the display pattern, and the determination of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning. You may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting winning, as the display mode of the hold display or the active display based on the starting winning. , The display pattern ε is determined at the highest ratio, the display pattern δ is determined at a ratio lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a ratio lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ. Is also determined at a low ratio, and the display pattern α may be determined at the lowest ratio (display pattern determination ratio at the time of winning flash effect execution decision: display pattern ε> display pattern δ> display pattern γ> display pattern β>. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to display patterns ε are provided as display modes of the specific display (hold display and active display), and when the specific display is displayed by the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the rate at which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed is higher than that when the pattern β or the display pattern γ is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific display by executing the flash effect at the time of winning, and the specific display. Since the player can pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the game interest can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern that displays the specific display in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern that displays the specific display in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern that displays the specific display in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns for displaying the specific display in a circle that blinks in white, the player can easily specify the difference in the specific display by the display color and the blinking mode.

In the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed by the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed as the display pattern β or the display depending on whether or not the flash effect is executed at the time of winning. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed by the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the flash effect at the time of winning is performed. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may be different depending on whether or not the specific display is executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the game entertainment is improved. can.

In the present modification 135SG-5, a display pattern δ blinking in white is exemplified as a special aspect of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention is not limited to this. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color other than the normal mode and the special mode of the specific display in the present invention, such as white, blue, and red (for example, purple, black, etc.).

Further, in the present modification 135SG-5, a mode suggesting that the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ has been exemplified, but the present invention has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute an action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed by the display pattern δ. ..

In particular, in the case of an action effect, as an effect mode of the action effect, a plurality of effect modes having different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ ( For example, the first action effect in which the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and the first action effect have different effects. It is an effect, and by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect). When the second action effect is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning may be executed at a higher rate than when the first action effect is executed.

By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the action effect is executed by the first action effect or the second action effect, and the action effect is second by executing the flash effect at the time of winning. It is possible to raise the expectation that it will be executed in the action production.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the ratio at which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed is higher than the case where the specific display is displayed by the display pattern δ. When the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the player is asked to change the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. Since it can be noticed, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern for the specific display (hold display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 135SG-6, a character as a specific display is used. It may act on another character, and as a result of the action, the display pattern of the specific display may be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-121 (A) and 15-121 (B), when the number of reserved first special figures is 3 and variable display is in progress, a prize is awarded to the first starting port. When (starting prize) occurs and the display pattern of the holding display based on the starting winning is determined as the display pattern ε as the holding display notice effect based on the starting winning, the fourth piece of the first holding storage display area 135SG005D is determined. The ally character is displayed as the hold display, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character (see FIG. 15-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 15-122 (A) and 15-122 (B), the variable display is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D. When the existing ally character (hold display of display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth hold display to the display position of the third hold display, the ally character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A as an enemy character. Acts on (shoots).

Then, every time the variable display ends again and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 15-122 (C) and 15-122 (D), the variable display is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D. When the ally character is moved from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display, and the ally character displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is the second hold. When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

When the variable display ends and the variable display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first hold display in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is actively displayed. Move to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character acts directly on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-123 (G) and 15-123 (H), when the ally character wins as a result of the effect of the battle effect, the ally character has the display pattern β or the display pattern β in the active display area 135SG005A. The display pattern changes to the active display of γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15-123 (I) and 15-123 (J), when the ally character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the enemy character or the ally character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. It changes to the active display of α.

In the present modification 135SG-6, when the hold display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the ally character as the hold display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A to display the active display. An example of a form in which the ally character that has become can be changed to the active display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display is displayed by the display pattern ε. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D, the ally character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the hold display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the hold display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the flash effect at the time of winning is executed than in the case where the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed in both cases. May be variable to the hold display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, not only can the player pay attention to the battle result between the ally character and the enemy character as the hold display of the display pattern ε, but also the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention as to whether or not it is present, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, the display pattern α to the display pattern γ described in the feature unit 135SG have a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε as display patterns for the hold display and the active display. However, when the hold display or active display is displayed by these display patterns δ or display pattern ε, it is the same as when the hold display or active display is displayed by display patterns α to display pattern γ. The specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the hold display or the active display is displayed by the display pattern δ, the specific display start effect A (see FIG. 15-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the hold display or the active display is displayed. When displaying with the display pattern ε, the specific display start effect B (see FIG. 15-20) as in the case of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, or the period during which the display of the hold display or the active display is completed is the specific display start. The specific display start effect that is longer than the effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the hold display or the active display is displayed by the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the hold display or the active display is displayed from the timing before the display of the hold display or the active display is completed, as in the case of the feature unit 135SG. , The flash effect sound at the time of winning and the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning will be recognized by the player.

Further, the feature unit 135SG exemplifies a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, as the modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed stepwise according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-124 (A) and 15-124 (B), a prize is awarded to the first start port during variable display in a state where three first special figure hold memories exist. When a start prize) occurs and it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, as shown in FIG. 15-124 (B), the flash at the time of the first prize. The production starts.

As the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, first, as shown in FIGS. 15-124 (B), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (V1> V2). , The flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off at the time of winning. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-125 (C) and 15-125 (D), the effect image 135SG005E is started to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash is started. The blinking control of the lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y in the cycle T1 is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at the luminance C1 which is higher than the luminance C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the first term is started, as shown in FIGS. 15-125 (D), 15-126 (E), and 15-126 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect B, An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F whose blinking is controlled is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. Then, after the character A moves to the first hold storage display area 135SG005D, the position where the hold display in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is displayed (in the case of the feature unit 135SG, the fourth hold). An animation that attacks (acts) on the display position) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first hold storage display area 135SG005D, the hold display, which is the target of the running flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term), gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the affected position. The appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). The hold display for which the appearance animation in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotation display as the other hold display as the specific display rotation display effect.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first half is completed, the flash effect at the time of the second prize is started from the end timing. As for the late winning flash effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-127 (G) and 15-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. , Blinking in the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2> cycle T1) of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, blinking in the brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the game effect lamp 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y (FIG. 15- 27 (A) to blinking in the mode shown in FIGS. 15-27 (D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. The lamp.

The blinking of the game effect lamp 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y in the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). Gradation with bluish colors, if the background image is an evening image, gradation with reddish colors, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, is a cycle longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1 but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (length of lamp blinking cycle: T0> T2). > T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not turned on during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-128 (I) and 15-128 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. 1 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B having transparency over the entire area of the display area 135SG005F is overlapped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-128 (J), 15-129 (K), and 15-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small size are displayed on the image display device 5. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a detachment (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is deleted from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of the late winning in the present modification 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the symbol determination period. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-128 (J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the symbol determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the flash effect compatible sound is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the hold display first displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display and is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The display position of the remaining hold display is shifted to the right by one. Further, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 15-129 (K) and 15-129 (L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B in the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. It may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this way, the silhouette image is duplicated in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 15-130 (M) and 15-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small symbol 135SG005M are combined to indicate that they are out of alignment in the image display device 5. Along with the derivation display (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is deleted from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol confirmation period, the flash effect at the time of the late winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-130 (N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the symbol determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping with the active display area 135SG005A. Further, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2.

In this modification 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a large size silhouette can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the embodiment in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed in an overlapping manner is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the silhouette image 135SG005S having a large size is not limited thereto. And the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in duplicate only when the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a surprise and improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and is active with the silhouette image 135SG005S according to the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S. Since the overlapping mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A may or may not overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display). A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-7, a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 is provided. Before the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is started, it overlaps with the holding display, which is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to be performed, and while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed, it overlaps with the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the hold display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the hold display but also the active display. It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by giving it even more surprise.

In the present modification 135SG-7, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning exemplifies a mode in which only one of the hold display and the active display is hidden, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where both the hold display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-7, a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be overlapped with the active display area 135SG005A and the first hold storage display area 135SG005D is exemplified, but the present invention illustrates the form. The present invention is not limited to this, and as illustrated in the feature unit 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, "middle". The silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be overlapped and displayed on the special symbol (see FIGS. 15-40, etc.) stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C. By doing so, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning hides the special symbol for notifying the temporary stop, so that the player can be surprised and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 135SG-7, as the revariable display effect in the present invention, a mode in which the special symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as the revariable display effect, an image different from the special symbol may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping with the image.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, if a start winning to the first starting port occurs during the execution of the reach effect of the super reach, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning is not determined (decided to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 135SG-8, when a start prize is generated to the first starting port during execution of the variable display, the variable display is performed. If the remaining period of the above is specified and the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning may not be determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the flash effect at the time of winning (flash effect at the time of winning the previous term) is executed, and the flash at the time of winning is executed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (holding display or active display) of the target of the production from becoming difficult to understand.

In the present modification 135SG-8, an embodiment is exemplified in which whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning is a period other than the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (for example, a period of 5 seconds or 10 seconds, etc.). ) And may be used as a reference.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first starting port occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of the previous term winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term. If this is the case, the flash effect at the time of winning may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is out of alignment. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appeal of the super reach reach effect and the winning flash effect from being lowered due to the overlapping execution of the super reach reach effect and the winning flash effect.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, as the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, the luminance C1 and the blinking in the cycle T1 (light emitting mode in the previous term winning flash effect) and the luminance C2 and the cycle T2. There are two light emitting modes, that is, blinking (light emitting mode in the flash effect at the time of late winning). On the other hand, as the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emitting effect, blue light emitting at the luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emitting at the luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern γ. It is provided. That is, the feature unit 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the number of light emitting modes of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emitting effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 135SG-9, the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emitting of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emitting effect. It may be different from the number of embodiments.

In particular, as shown in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as display patterns for the hold display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are provided as the light emission mode of the start port lamp 135SG009S in the start port lamp light emission effect. Even if the number of light emitting modes of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emitting effect is provided to be larger than the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect by providing the light emitting mode according to the display pattern ε. good. By doing so, the variation of the light emission of the start port lamp 135SG009S increases, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 135SG exemplifies a mode in which the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is emitted as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the start port lamp 135SG009S is emitted at the start port lamp emission effect, but the present invention is limited thereto. However, as a modification 135SG-10, even if the light emitting region where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is provided larger than the light emitting region where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, when it is decided to execute both the flash effect at the time of winning and the hold display advance notice effect based on the start winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning generates the starting prize. The start lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display, which is the target of the start prize flash effect, while the start port lamp 135SG009S is the target of the hold display notice effect after the start prize occurs (at the time of winning). Since it emits light until the end of the variable display (variable display that is the target of the flash effect), by applying the modified example 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is executed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the start port lamp 135SG009S will be controlled to the big hit game state by the light emitting mode of the start port lamp 135SG009S, while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, a mode in which the start port lamp 135SG009S is made to emit light without blinking is exemplified as a start port lamp light emission effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the start port lamp light emission effect is started. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Further, when the start port lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the start port lamp light emission effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the start port lamp 135SG009S is set to the blinking cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. It may be different. By making the blinking cycle of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning different from the blinking cycle of the start port lamp 135SG009S in this way, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and the blinking of the start port lamp 135SG009S. It can be made to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 135SG-11, when a flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the brightness of the backlight or the like once built in the image display device 5 is used. The flash effect at the time of winning may be started after the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the value. In this way, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the player can easily recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning by reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In the present modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display. Although an example is shown in which the image display device 5 is changed to a low visibility state having lower visibility than the immediately preceding state by changing the brightness of the device 5, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to lowering the 5 brightness (brightness) of the image display device, the display of the image on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped. The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in the vertical direction and the like, and the image display device 5 is relatively displayed by increasing the brightness of the game effect lamp 9. It may be something that reduces the visibility of the image.

That is, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means a state in which the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than that of the immediately preceding state, by a method other than the reduction of the brightness of the image display device 5. Some of them reduce the visibility of the image.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, when the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided according to the start winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. An example is an example in which the flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the time of winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-12, a flash effect at the time of winning is produced according to the starting prize. When execution is decided, after the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the hold display and the active display is completed. You may. By doing so, it is possible to promptly recognize that the start winning has occurred due to the blinking (light emission) of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and that the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided. You can improve the game entertainment.

In this modification 135SG-12, after the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts blinking, the flash effect corresponding sound at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the hold display and the active display is completed. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning starts blinking, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and the hold display and the like. The appearance animation of the active display may be started.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the feature unit 135SG outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 and for the flash at the time of winning during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning. The brightness C1 of the lamp 135SG009F and the blinking in the cycle T1, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning. An example is exemplified in a mode in which the output in V2, the brightness C2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, the blinking in the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, but the present invention is limited thereto. As a modification 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second half, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize. , Output at the volume V1 of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and temporarily display the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. You may. By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize, the output at the volume V1 of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R and the flash at the time of winning are the same as the flash effect at the time of the first prize. The player recognizes that the variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is started by executing the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. Since it can be made easier, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In the present modification 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second half, when the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize. The speaker 8L and 8R temporarily execute the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the brightness C1 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the blinking at the period T1, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the speaker 8L, 8R at the time of winning. Output at the volume V1 of the sound corresponding to the flash effect, blinking at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and executing only one or two of the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. You may do so.

Further, as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set (FIGS. 1 to 14), and the hold display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are performed based on the start winning prize. It is feasible, and the change in the light emitting mode as the flash effect at the time of winning differs depending on the lamp (feature part 135SG, FIGS. 15-1 to 15-68), and the flash effect at the time of winning during the variable display symbol determination period. (Modified example 135SG-1, Fig. 15-69 to Fig. 15-89), it is possible to execute the reach production of super reach with different jackpot expectations, and the movable body moves before the reach production with high jackpot expectations. The effect can be executed, and when the movable body motion effect is executed, the light emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the start timing of the movable body motion effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect. (Modification 2, FIGS. 15-90 to 15-107), the step-up effect can be executed during the variable display, and when the step-up effect is executed when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the flash at the time of winning is executed. While the lamp 135SG009F emits light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect, when the step-up effect is executed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emitting mode of the lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is used as the flash effect at the time of winning. A lamp that does not change from the corresponding light emission mode (modification example 135SG-3, FIGS. 15-108 to 15-118), a movable body motion effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of the super reach, and a flash lamp at the time of winning. When the light emitting mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emitting mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emitting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect. A display pattern α to a display pattern ε is provided as a display mode of the hold display or the active display, and the jackpot expectation is different depending on the case where the light emission mode is changed (modification example 135SG-4, FIG. 15-119). Depending on the decision to execute the flash effect at the time of winning due to the winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the hold display or the active display differs (modification example 135SG-5, FIG. 15-). 120) When the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern of the hold display, the display pattern is displayed from the display pattern ε according to the execution of the action effect. A silhouette that changes to any of the elements α to the display pattern γ (modification example 135SG-6, FIGS. 15-121 to 15-123), and is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the display mode of the image 135SG005S changes (modification example 135SG-7, FIGS. 15-124 to 15-130), the pachinko gaming machine of the present invention has a plurality of feature portions thereof. From the modified example, two or more feature portions and modified examples may be combined and carried out.

Further, in the feature unit 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine for performing a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine for performing a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs the above.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, the special suggestion effect and the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect, which have a lower expectation of being controlled by the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. , A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including the fourth suggestion effect,
It is notified that the special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified, and that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. After that, a development effect execution means that can execute a special development effect different from the special development effect as a second development pattern,
A development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect,
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect.
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed.
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production.
The special development effect includes a first effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect that is executed after the first effect and in which the previous stage information is visibly displayed, and the second effect. Including the third effect, which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which the latter stage information having a higher degree of emphasis than the first stage information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter,
Moreover,
Light emitting means that can emit light,
Display means that can display a specific display corresponding to variable display,
An effect executing means capable of executing a specific display effect for displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect for causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied.
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect.
The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed.
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means.
The first light emitting means has the specific light emission in the first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing and the second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect. It emits light in a manner that suits the production.
The second light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a mode corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images